JP2023099209A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of securing an object detectable range, while making it hard for a player to view a sensor device.SOLUTION: A cover member 621 of a center cover 620 includes a front face side formed into a projecting curved surface. A sensor 630 is disposed outside the center cover 620 and disposed, with an irradiation surface 631 facing a center of the cover member 621, so that light irradiated from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 621 to make it reach the object, and the reflected light by the object is reflected by the cover member 621 to make it reach the sensor device. Consequently, the sensor 630 can be spaced from the center cover 620 by that amount so as to secure an object detectable range, while making it hard for a player to view the sensor 630.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and that light (for example, a game A gaming machine is known that includes a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by a person's hand (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-208139 A

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of securing a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player. With the goal.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and emitting light. a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by the object of the light, the sensor device being arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, A front member having at least a front surface formed as a convex curved surface and made of a light transmissive material is provided.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

The game machine according to claim 3 is the game machine according to claim 2, further comprising a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a peripheral edge of the front member. Among them, the first portion is disposed at a position closer to the front side than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, the visibility of the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the curvature of the front member can be increased.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (a) is a side view of the regulating unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulating unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulating unit taken along line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20(b). 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in section XXII of FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b); (c) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23(c). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member; It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the rotating unit, (b) is a front view of the rotating unit as seen in direction XXIXb in FIG. 29(a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc in FIG. 29(a) Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit on line; (a) is a top view of an intermediate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). (a) is a front view of the front cover, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). (a) is a top view of a reflector, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). (a) is a top view of the rotation unit, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). 33(a) and 33(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit in section XXXIV of FIG. 33(b). (a) and (b) are front views of a rotation unit. (a) and (b) are top views of the rotating unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame; FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 39(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVa-XLVa of FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in the second embodiment. (a) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49(b). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device according to a third embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a sorting device. (a) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVc-LVc. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. reference). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only is the winning probability of the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 640 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric role product is opened once. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for displaying patterns in a variable manner, and the passage of the ball through the first through gates 66, 67 as a trigger to variably display the second pattern. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided.

A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 600 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time. A variable display is performed by alternately turning on the lights. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gates 66, 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variation and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the 640 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gates 66 , 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured to allow some of the balls that flow down the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66, 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gates 66, 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B described above, and the second symbol suspension lamp (Fig. not shown). Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the first through gates 66, 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). Also good. Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, the ball is shot so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and by winning the prize in the first prize winning port 64, there are many chances of winning the big prize lottery, and aiming for the big prize, It is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66, 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since the state is such that it is easy to win a prize, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning port 640 so as to pass through the right side of the variable display device unit 80, passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, and enters the first It is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). can change the way Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions, and FIG. Each member 430 is shown displaced to its extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, a vertically displaceable unit 400 is provided above and a light-emitting decoration is provided below. A unit 800 is arranged respectively.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 which is arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a displacement member 430 and a decorative member which are arranged on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the back case 300, and a projection projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third pattern display device 81). position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500. By rotating the rotating unit 500 and causing the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotating unit 500 to emit light, the pattern is formed by an afterimage of light. and patterns can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 arranged on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 821 arranged inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

Next, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47. FIG. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14 , the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shaped shape when viewed from the front, a rear base 420 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 410 , and a front side of the front base 410 . , a displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and one end of the displacement member 430 connected to the displacement member 430 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9) as the displacement member 430 is displaced. direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. side wall members 470 arranged at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450; and rotation regulation arranged on the front side of the front base 410. and a member 480 .

In the vertical displacement unit 400, all the members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a pair symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair. Further, in the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair, only the member arranged on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 9) will be explained, and the member arranged on the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 9) , are assigned the same reference numerals as those on the left side in front view, and description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 410 is formed of a plate-like body that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the front. It is formed mainly with two pieces 410Y.

The first piece 410X is arranged such that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). In addition, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 standing on the front side of the left-right outer end (left end), an upper recessed groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross-section at the top, and a cross-section at the bottom. A lower recessed groove 414 formed in an arc shape is mainly provided.

The standing portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 described later to restrict the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from the top to the bottom of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

The upper recessed groove 413 and the lower recessed groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1, which will be described later, is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. In addition, the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 are formed so that the axes of the semi-circular cross-sections are located on the same straight line, and the upper end of the upper groove 413 extends from the lower groove 414 . is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 .

The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the back side, and a columnar support portion 416 projecting to the back side. Formed by the Lord.

The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted through the rear side of the front base 410 , and is a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441 . The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411 . As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be inserted through the opening 411 and arranged. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while inserting the drive motor 441 into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposing parts, this can be done easily, and the number of man-hours at the time of part replacement can be reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 can be reliably fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443, the reliability can be improved when parts are replaced.

The engaging portion 415 is a projection for locking one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and projects from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and the projecting tip thereof bends toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. It is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 about its axis with the portion protruding toward the back side, and restrict the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side with the bent portion at the tip.

The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back side of the front base 410 .

The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400. The transmission gear 442 is arranged on the front base 410 and arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 as described above. , 443 .

As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441 , and is arranged to mesh with the transmission gear 443 .

The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the projection 417 of the front base 410 fitted in its shaft hole. It is arranged in a state of meshing with the gear 442 . Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442 .

Further, the transmission gear 443 has a protrusion 443a protruding from the side surface on the back side. The projection 443 a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443 . Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the drive motor 441 to rotate the transmission gear 443 as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc about the axis of the transmission gear 443 .

The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and has a standing portion 421 standing on the front side on the outer edge.

The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is greater than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. It is set to have a large dimension, and is arranged in a state where the front end surface is in contact with the back side of the front base 410 . As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacing member 430 described later can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape in which the outer edge portion protrudes to the rear side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a circular through hole 433 penetrating in the front-rear direction in its bent portion, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 penetrating in the front-rear direction on one side of the long side, and a sliding hole 432 on the short side. It mainly includes a drive-side slide hole 431 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the other side, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

The through hole 433 is a hole into which the pivot portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot portion 416 . Therefore, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined after the through hole 433 is inserted into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410 , so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410 . can be placed in

The drive-side sliding hole 431 is an elongated hole through which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side slide hole 431 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the short side of the displacement member 430 , and as described above, the transmission gear 443 transmits the driving force of the drive motor 441 . When the transmission gear 443 is rotated by , the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side slide hole 431 as it is displaced, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433 . In other words, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be caused to move around the through hole 433. As shown in FIG.

The decoration-side slide hole 432 is an elongated hole that is provided in the decoration member 450 described later and through which the columnar support portion 452a is inserted. formed larger than The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the long side of the displacement member 430 . As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated around the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 forms an arcuate displacement trajectory around the through-hole 433. FIG.

The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion that protrudes from the rear side of the displacement member 430 . Further, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on the bent inner side surface of the displacement member 430 that is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, the other end side of the torsion spring SP<b>1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the rear side of the displacement member 430 .

The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion arranged around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410), and rotates leftward in front view around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit A displacement member 430 constituting the right side in front view of 400 is applied with a biasing force (right rotation in front view) around its rotation axis. 430 are engaged with displacement-side engaging portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates to the left with respect to the front base 410 around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 when viewed from the front rotates to the right). ) is always biased in the direction of

As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member that is interposed between a pair of facing vertical displacement units 400 that are configured as a pair of left and right units, and the size in the left and right direction is symmetrical with respect to the front base. It is set to be the same as the distance dimension between the outer ends in the horizontal direction of 410 .

The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with an open lower side, and includes a front base 452 forming a central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. 452 , and a rotating unit 500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent toward the rear side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the back side, engaging portions 452b protruding from both left and right ends to the front side, smooth contact surfaces 452h formed on the front side at both left and right ends, and and an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed into a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 rotates around the through-hole 433, it is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced as the decoration-side slide hole 432 is displaced. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the supporting portion 452a.

The engaging portion 452b is a projection with which the other end of the urging spring SP2, which will be described later, is engaged.

The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that slopes downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the later-described regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be given later.

The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section and extending in the vertical direction. Further, the sliding portion 451 has a through hole 451a that opens vertically. The through hole 451a is an opening into which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decoration member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by applying a driving force from the driving motor 441 .

The rear base 453 is a plate member that covers the rear side of the front base 452 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and has substantially the same outer size in front view as the central portion of the front base 452 . As a result, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 . A drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 to output a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 . A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the driving motor 457 will be given later.

The front cover 460 is arranged to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410, and is a member that covers the front of the first piece 410X. They are formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is formed into a box-like body with an open rear side, having erected walls 461 erected on the rear side from the outer edge thereof.

The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 projecting upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a groove 462a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a groove 463a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side.

The recessed grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes of the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line, and the distance from the upper end of the concave groove 462a to the lower end of the concave groove 463a is It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

Therefore, when the front cover 460 is arranged in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper recessed groove 413 and the recessed groove 462a and the lower recessed groove 414 and the recessed groove 463a. The guide rod P1 can be arranged on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to fall off.

Also, the distance between the upright wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the laterally outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 facing each other in the front-rear direction. is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the outer end portion of the sliding portion 451 in the left-right direction is arranged between them. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends of the vertically displaceable unit 400 on the central side in the left-right direction, and are formed of substantially L-shaped plate bodies bent toward the rear side when viewed from the side. A wall surface that bends outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, is attached to the wall surface.

Further, the side wall member 470 has a pattern by unevenness or color on the side surface of the central side in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400, so that the player can easily see the center frame 86 of the game board 13. 2) so that the pattern of the side wall member 470 can be visually recognized through the central opening. As a result, the vertically displaceable unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460, etc.) disposed laterally outside of the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to the player.

The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having an axis extending in the front-rear direction is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rotation restricting member 480 . Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns the later-described rotation unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be defined by the contact between the roller 481 and the top base 510 .

The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. As shown in FIG. As a result, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410 . Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the central portion. As a result, the length of the biasing spring SP2 can be secured, and an excessive increase in the biasing force can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG.

15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, in which FIG. 15 (a) shows the state arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16 (a) shows the state between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17(a) corresponds to the state arranged in the lowered position, respectively.

15(b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15(a), FIG. 16(b) in FIG. 16(a), and FIG. 17(b) in FIG. 17(a). . 15(b), 16(b), and 17(b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed in the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the “second position”), the displacement member 430 is positioned at one end. The side (the long side where the decorative side slide hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decorative member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decorative member 450 is positioned inside the decorative slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end of the through hole 433 from the axis thereof.

Also, in this state, the rotational direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving-side slide hole 431 is formed) is substantially the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. match. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through hole 433, and the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can suppress the displacement member 430 from rotating.

From the state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are pushed downward by sliding through the drive-side slide holes 431 .

As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433, and as shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward. From this state, when each transmission gear 443 is further rotated by the rotational driving of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, and the state shown in FIGS. As shown, the decorative member 450 is placed in the lowered position (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as the "first position").

As shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are positioned on one side (driving side slide hole 431 is formed). The short side of the display device 450 is swung downward, so that the decorative member 450 is positioned at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the lowered position), the decoration-side slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the end portion radially outward from the edge. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 acts on the supporting portion 452a to displace the force in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the lateral direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the central portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacing operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later.

Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, the rattling causes the displacement member 430 to displace. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, lptp that causes the decorative member 450 to rattle can be suppressed.

Further, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of the decorative member 450 . As a result, displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be given later.

Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 490; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape with an open back side, roller members 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. and an outer edge member 493 disposed on the open (opening side) outer edge.

The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left and right direction, and an inner side surface facing the opening protruding toward the back side. and a bulging portion 491c.

The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. By doing so, the regulation unit 490 can be arranged on the side wall member 470 .

The notch portions 491b are formed by notching two notch portions 491b on both sides in the left-right direction of the case member 491 so as to be aligned in the up-down direction in a semicircular shape. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and its inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492 .

The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20(c)) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491 . Moreover, the bulging portion 491 c has a predetermined gap between it and the roller 492 a of the roller member 492 .

The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a made of an elastic member and formed in an annular shape when viewed in a cross-sectional view from the axis, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and supported by the shaft portion 492b. A pair of collars 492c arranged on the outer side of the collars 492c and a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted on the shaft portion 492b outside the collars 492c.

The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted through the inner circumference of the roller 492a. is set larger than the width dimension of In addition, recessed portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 492b in the axial direction. The recessed portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an axial outer diameter smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1, which will be described later.

The collar 492c has an annular shape when viewed from the front and a substantially stepped cross-section, and is composed of a small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and a large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than that of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1. The inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and the large-diameter tubular portion 492c2) is smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, so that the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is formed larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. be done.

The large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a member for restricting lateral displacement when the roller member 492 is arranged in the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. In addition, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both ends of the roller 492a in the axial direction is greater than the distance dimension between the opposed left and right side surfaces on the inner side of the opening of the case member 491. is also formed small.

The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted into the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b around the recess 492b1 with its opening widened. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is fitted in the recessed portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to the collar 492c from the other end on one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). ), the shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion is rotated with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 directed to one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b is inserted. After that, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the recessed portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

As a result, the lateral displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 491 . The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the shape of the inner circumference when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the shape of the inner circumference of the opening of the case member 491 when viewed from the rear. Also, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 493a. The recessed portion 493 a 1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 491 b of the case member 491 . Therefore, the roller member 492 can be arranged in the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491 facing each other.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c, which are arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492, are arranged vertically in the cutout portion 491b of the case member 491 in such a manner as to pivotally support them. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the standing portion 493a facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491 and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491 .

Next, the operation of regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in section XXII of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). . In addition, in FIG. 22(a), the outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by dashed lines.

23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24(a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a). 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b), and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400; FIG. 23(a) to 23(c) illustrate transition states of the vertical displacement unit 400, and outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is positioned at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned downward. In this case, both ends of the decorative member 450 are positioned on the rear side of the regulation unit 490 as described above.

In this case, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 (described later) is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means includes an engaging member arranged on either the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be able to engage with the engaging member and the decorative member 450 or the front base. 410 and an engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and utilizing the displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. When the decorative member 450 is positioned at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only is it necessary to retreat, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displacement of the decorative member 450 from the first position toward the second position), the biasing force of the biasing means is resisted. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490, thereby regulating the relative displacement of the front base 410. Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel, so that the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. When displacing, the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

Further, since the roller 492a is made of an elastic material that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 contacts the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer circumference of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 .

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and isolating the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side and loosening of fastening portions can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (e.g., when it is rotated at relatively high speeds to act as a versalytor), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are emitted from the decorative member 450. Since it is input to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other, the roller 492a is elastically deformed, so that the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed. Therefore, there is no need to increase the precision when molding the parts, and the manufacturing cost of the parts can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of products can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being spoiled. Further, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is perpendicular to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, so that the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a come into contact with each other. When displacing in contact, it is possible to suppress the sound of the members rubbing against each other. That is, if the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist in stopping the displacement member or to suppress rattling, the members rub against each other when the displacement member is displaced while being in contact with the projection. A sound is produced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a.

In addition, since the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410 can regulate the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 relatively heavy is arranged in the decorative member 450. Since the decorative member 450 is not necessary, the driving force required for displacing the decorative member 450 can be reduced by reducing the weight. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be made lighter, rattling can be easily suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the manner of contact between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. placed without contact.

23(a) and 24(a), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward, and as shown in FIGS. When the member 491 is displaced to substantially the same vertical position as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 come into contact. It is considered to be in a state of As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front, rear, left, and right directions.

That is, the upper roller 492a is pushed out by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and contacts the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(b)). Therefore, the decorative member 450 is restrained from rattling in the front-rear direction. Further, the roller 492a is rotatable in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves left and right. be able to.

On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is vertically displaced at the first position. can be made

Further, as described above, the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, so that the inclined surface 452g can be used when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position. can guide the roller 492a to the front side of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 to the first position can be suppressed.

23(b) and 24(b), when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

Here, if the rattling of the decorative member 450 that is vertically displaced is suppressed by a rotating body (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating body (roller 492a) It is difficult to restrict the movement of the decorative member 450 along the direction of displacement and to prevent the decorative member 450 from being displaced due to rattling in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side in which the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) is aligned with the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. , the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 490 allows only vertical displacement of the decorative member 450 to the first position, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are displaced. By forming the dead point, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Further, the roller 492 a arranged below the rollers 492 a arranged in the vertical direction is in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491 c of the case member 491 .

That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) toward the front side (right side in FIG. 24(c)). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. This increases the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b, making it difficult to rotate the roller 492a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved forward and backward (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(c)). to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter A structure that allows displacement in the direction is required.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, and its elastic deformation is used to move the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a need not be formed to be radially displaceable, the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As shown in FIG. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 does not move against the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. When the roller 492a is caught between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to looseness, the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 are separated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a. The roller 492a can be easily held by the bulging portion 491c more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is minimized. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper end to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased, so when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit is provided in the central portion of the decorative member 450, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, each part receives the weight of the decorative member 450 and the kinetic energy when displaced. Since it works, the parts are easily damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopping operation can be assisted when displacing to the first position, it is possible to assist the stopping operation in the direction in which damage is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the breakage of the parts and improve the reliability of the product.

Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged vertically along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are contacted at two points with a predetermined gap therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from tilting, and to prevent the rotation unit 500 from rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 . As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, the front base of the decorative member 450 associated with the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position and when displacing the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling with respect to 410 .

Specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotating unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotating unit 500 (the motion in which the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500 . Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is contact surface) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. At the same time, the abutment of the abutment surface 452h of the front base 452 against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a effectively suppresses the looseness of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotary unit 500. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 arranged on the decorative member 450 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 arranged between the front base 452 and the rear base 453, and a driving motor attached to the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c recessed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c has an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion thereof in the front-rear direction, and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. be.

The rear base 453 is formed of a plate-like body that is oblong in the front view and has a horizontally long rectangular shape smaller than the front view of the front base 452. The rear base 453 has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape that extends in the front-rear direction on the right side in the front view. It is mainly formed with an open insertion hole 453a and cylindrical support portions 453c and 453d projecting toward the front side.

The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 (to be described later) is inserted. is opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape that is larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

The shaft support portions 453 c and 453 d are shaft portions that are inserted into the shaft portions of the gears 455 and 456 to be described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456 .

The drive motor 457 is a motor with a built-in encoder for position detection, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 as described above. It is fastened and fixed.

The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and fixedly attached to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453 a of the rear base 453 . In addition, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed to have a smaller thickness. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshing with the gear 454 .

The gear 455 is meshed with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later. possible. In addition, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the driving motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455 to rotate the rear base 571 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 , and meshes with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 arranged in front of the front base 452 .

A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 . The gear 456 is a member having a projection on its side surface (end surface in the axial direction) for detecting the initial position (reference position). It is arranged on the base 453 . A part of the gear 456 is inserted through the second opening 452 e and is meshed with the rear base 571 . Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force to rotate the gears 454, 455 and the rotating unit 500 (back base 571), the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. . As a result, the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be detected.

In this case, the number of gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. The gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotating unit 500 . This makes it possible to easily perform initial position detection (reference position).

The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating unit 500, and is configured such that a shaft portion 458a projecting from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed to have a substantially D-shaped cross section, and has a passage opened therein through which an electrical wiring is inserted.

When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by passing through the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a and the electric wiring is inserted. and protrude from the front of the front base 452 .

Next, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 29(a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as seen in direction XXIXb of FIG. 29(a), and FIG. 29(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29(a). It should be noted that the description of the rotation unit 500 is based on the initial position (reference position).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper base 510. , an intermediate member 540 arranged below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the rear side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear base 571 arranged on the rear side and a front base 572 arranged on the front side. , a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a which bulges in a circular ring shape when viewed from the rear to the rear side from the inner peripheral edge portion. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. Gear 571a1 meshes with gear 455 as described above. Accordingly, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the rear base 571 (the gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 572a erected from an outer peripheral edge portion and an inner standing portion 572b erected from an inner peripheral portion in a U shape when viewed from the front. And prepare.

The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and holding the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 therebetween. It is set to have substantially the same standing height as the axial width dimension of the BR, and is set to have substantially the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

The side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the side of the erected distal end is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear surface side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. , and is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the inner shape thereof is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front base 452 , the inner standing portion 572 b can be fitted onto the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 are engaged with each other, so that the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, twisting of the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be suppressed.

The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572 a of the front base 572 . As a result, the bearing BR can be fixed to the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 and disposed. In this case, the inner diameter of the rear base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off from the rotation transmission unit 570 .

The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotation unit 500 to the front base 452 . The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572 b of the front base 572 . As a result, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that its outer edge portion is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR, and the inner edge portion of the fastening member 573 is inserted through the inner rising portion 572b of the front base. .

The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 with a constant protruding dimension over the entire circumference. and its outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 .

More specifically, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to restrict the rearward movement of the fastening member 573 with respect to the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is achieved by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other. are abutted and regulated. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed.

Further, since the fastening member 573 to which the bearing BR is fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of rotational motion to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body arranged outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the ring-shaped metal body arranged inside the bearing BR rotates. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the fastening member 573 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450 .

The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 29(a)) when viewed from above, and its front edge portion curves downward (toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29(a)). It is formed into a curved shape. The top base 510 has a decorative portion 511 that bulges out in a semicircular shape in a front view at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29(b)), and a blowing hole 512 that penetrates in the up-down direction (plate pressure direction). , and a pressing portion 513 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape.

The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572 . Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

The air blowing hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(c)), and is formed in an elongated hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(a)). In addition, a plurality of blow holes 512 are formed in the horizontal direction along the arc shape of the upper base 510 .

When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 and the upper surface base 510 sandwiched between them, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The projection height is set to the height up to the side surface of the upper surface of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29(c)). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed to protrude from the rear edge of the upper base 510 .

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570 . The decoration part 521 and the blow hole 522 formed in the lower base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the blow hole 512 formed in the upper base 510, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that when viewed from the front, the front base The bottom side of 572 can be invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the mechanism when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the player.

The irradiation unit 530 mainly includes a base member 531 and an LED 532 arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531 .

The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is slightly smaller than the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. Accordingly, when the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

Further, the base member 531 is formed with a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the base member 531, and detailed description thereof will be given later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458 b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531 . As a result, light can be emitted from an LED 532, which will be described later, through an IC and a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531. FIG.

The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) when viewed from the front, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicone sealed in the cavity) for irradiating light. The surface of the encapsulating resin such as the . Further, the LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. As a result, the LED 532 can irradiate light onto a reflector 560, which will be described later.

The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body having a top view shape substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510 . Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the opposed parts.

The front cover 550 is made of a transparent light-transmissive material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. Further, the front cover 550 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 side.

The reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. In addition, the reflector 560 has a recessed portion 564 formed by notching the side surface on the front side to the rear.

By inserting the above-described front cover 550 into the cutout portion of the concave cutout portion 564, the front surface of the front cover 550 is placed at substantially the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recess 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surface of the upper base 510 , the lower base 520 and the intermediate member 540 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from protruding from the rotation unit 500 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integral unit with little unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being spoiled by making it difficult to understand the outer shape of each part. .

A detailed description of intermediate member 540 will now be provided with reference to FIG. 30(a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a).

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge that stands upward (in the direction in which the upper base 510 is arranged) from the outer edge when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetrating in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 projecting from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a projecting portion projecting from the edge on the front side. It mainly includes a portion 545 and a groove portion 546 recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 .

The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side of the first outer edge portion 541 (lower side in FIG. 30(a)) when viewed from above is approximately the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from the top side. set to be the same. Also, the standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531 . Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 to be invisible from the front side.

The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the back side. The shape of the rear surface side (upper side in FIG. 30A) of the second outer edge portion 542 when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape of the rear surface side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Also, the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is arranged in contact with the standing tip surface of the second outer edge portion 542 . Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the rear side.

The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for separately dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, the light of adjacent LED532 can suppress irradiating another range. Also, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are arranged coaxially. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 to be described later through the irradiation hole 543 .

Also, the irradiation hole 543 is formed such that the inner diameter increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 .

The irradiation regulating portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. As a result, the gap between the opposing LEDs 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light from the LEDs 532 can easily enter the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543 . As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the erecting dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 , and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the protruding tip surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are aligned. The LED 532 abuts thereon. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent LEDs from entering the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation regulation portion 544 that abuts on the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the adjacent irradiation regulating portion 544 are connected to each other at their outer peripheral surfaces, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the radiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent radiation restricting portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are connected to each other. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly convex circular arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, leftward, and rightward, and is formed at a position where it is inserted through the through hole 531a of the base member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. The protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameters are combined vertically, and includes a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side which is smaller in diameter than the large diameter portion 545a. formed from

The large-diameter portion 545 a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 . The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531 a , and the projecting dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 .

As a result, when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the interval between the intermediate member 540 on the back side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542 . In addition, since the projection distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is aligned with the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. can be arranged parallel to each other.

The small-diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. The outer diameter is set to be the same or slightly smaller. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, by fitting the through hole 531a of the base member 531 to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, the irradiation unit 530 can be moved to the intermediate member 540 in the front, rear, left, and right directions. can define the movement of

The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and is recessed to have a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased due to the groove portion 546 being recessed, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 . That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is ensured. The operation of the LEDs 532 can increase the space for the portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, thereby enhancing the heat dissipation effect.

The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recess depth of the groove portion 546 is set to be less than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. set small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the front cover 550 will be described in detail. 31(a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). In addition, in FIG.31(b), the spreading|diffusion part 551 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion part 551 on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31(b)) of the lower side (left side in FIG. 31(b)). formed with.

The diffusing portion 551 is a portion whose surface is roughened, and the roughened surface of the diffusing portion 551 diffuses and diffuses the light irradiated onto the diffusing portion 551 . Note that surface roughening is a processing mode in which unevenness is formed on the surface.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the reflector 560 will be described in detail. 32(a) is a top view of the reflector 560, and FIG. 32(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector 560 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). In addition, in FIG.32(b), the reflection part 563 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 32(a)) and the partition wall 561. It mainly includes a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an erecting wall 562 erected along the edge on the back side.

The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with an open front side (lower side in FIG. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent erected walls 562 are combined (commonly used) with wall portions extending in the front direction to form one wall portion. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are arranged side by side can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 to be formed can be maximized.

The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of the region surrounded by the edge portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like in a top view. Further, the reflecting portion 563 is connected to a horizontal portion 563a formed of side surfaces parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, and connected to the horizontal portion 563a so that the plate thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases. and a slanted surface 563b that is slanted in the direction.

The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface parallel to the top surface and the bottom surface of the reflector 560, other than the edge portion on the front side. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and the surface is not roughened. Accordingly, the reflecting portion 563 can be formed by holding the front edge portion of the reflecting plate 560 . As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion on the reflecting plate 560 when roughening the surface, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. formed on the surface.

The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set at a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532 . As a result, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the rear side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

As described above, the erected wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflector 560, and its erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is arranged above the reflector 560). That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of heat inside the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, the heat is accumulated by the rotating unit 500, and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 is heated. Damage can be suppressed.

The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circular portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted onto the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572 from the outside. After the front base 572, the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 are integrated, the rear base 571 is arranged on the rear side, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

In the front part of the rotation unit 500 (the part excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), the lower base 520 is arranged below the reflector 560, and the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened. After the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface of the reflector 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched therebetween. The irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through hole 531 a fitted onto the small diameter portion 545 b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540 . In this state, the top base 510 is arranged from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, thereby assembling the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) as a unit.

Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened together to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33(a) is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 33(a). (a) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV section of FIG. 33(b).

Note that FIG. 33A shows a state in which the top base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34(a) and 34(b), the light emitted from the LED 532 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 33( a ) and 33 ( b ), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 , a reflecting section 563 partitioned as one area by being surrounded by a partition wall 561 is arranged. . As described above, each LED 532 is arranged above each irradiation hole 543, so that the light emitted from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state divided by each reflecting portion 563, so that the division of light from each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

In addition, since the structure for causing the light from the LEDs 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and is side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, even when the base member 531 is oriented so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (blinking) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

In addition, the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 allows the light emitted from the LED 532 to be efficiently emitted toward the player. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Some of the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560 is reflected again by the opposing surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560) to irradiate the front cover 550. FIG.

In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white, which has a lower light absorptivity than black. On the other hand, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, as described above, so that the light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 can be easily reflected again.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and can be emitted to the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being evenly dispersed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being viewed in a state where it is concentrated in a part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a and side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can pass through the front cover 550 and be emitted to the front side.

Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed on the front side end portion of the reflector 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. , the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the inner surface of the reflector 560 is roughened at the end on the front side of the rotating unit 500, the light is diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the side of the hitting player) ), the front end portion of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least the reflecting portion 563 has a flatter and smoother surface than the rough surface processed. can be suppressed, and the amount of light directed toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

In addition, the partition wall 561 is formed on the front side (the recessed portion 564 is formed at the end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (the portion where the rough surface processing of the reflecting portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the shape tapers toward the end of the rotary unit 500, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the non-roughened portion of the horizontal portion 563a increases toward the end of the front side of the rotary unit 500. Enlarged (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Furthermore, since the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to curve toward the rear toward the end with the central portion (rotational axis) in the left-right direction as the center, the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. The end of the side where the cutout 564 is formed) is closer to the front side (the side where the cutout 564 is formed) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the distance from the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 increases in the radial direction. side) is increased in length dimension. Thereby, the visible lightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the LEDs 532 closer to the axis of rotation appears to have higher brightness (brighter) than the light of the LEDs 532 farther (outward in the radial direction) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the farther the front end of the reflecting plate 560 is from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction, the more the front side (concave cutout) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 is. Since the length of the end portion of the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is spaced radially outward from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, the stronger the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (that is, by reducing the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In addition, since the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases with increasing distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction, the number of reflecting portions 563 increases. It is possible to make each visible lightness (brightness of light) uniform.

The light emitted to the front cover 550 can be diffused in the traveling direction by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550 . That is, the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550 can bend the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Also, if the light from the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without being transmitted through a light-transmissive material member), the light from the LED 532 has high directivity in the forward direction, so the player is dazzled. I was afraid to feel

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the surfaces that diffusely reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 532 are formed at two locations, the reflector 560 and the front cover 550, so that the directivity of the light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling when visually recognizing the emitted light.

Here, there is known a device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position, thereby performing display using an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the attitude of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side)). (orientation parallel to the plane of rotation), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered when the rotation of the rotating display device (rotating unit 500) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is positioned so that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the outer shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (viewed in the rotation axis direction). As a result, the visibility of the rear side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved when the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is stopped.

Next, rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

35(a) and 35(b) are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 36(a) and 36(b) are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

35(a) to 36(b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and is given the symbol of airflow K. As shown in FIG. Also, air blow holes 512 and 522 of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are illustrated by dashed lines.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, only the case where the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the left when viewed from the front will be described. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457, the rotation causes outside air to enter through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotating unit 500, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air blowing holes 512 and 522 pass through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. It is possible to make it easier for outside air to enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 .

More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated leftward in front view, in the initial position, the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the right side in front view and the air blow hole in the lower base 520 formed on the left side in front view are formed. 522 is displaced in the direction of taking in (passing through) the air into the blowing holes 512 and 522 . As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

It should be noted that the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 and the air blow hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis. External air can be easily drawn into the rotating unit 500 by the air blowing holes 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air blowing holes 522 of the lower base 520 formed on the right side of the unit 500 when viewed from the front. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the right, the same effects as in the case described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the left in the front view) are obtained.

Here, a base (base member 531) on which an LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If it is not possible to sufficiently cool the heat generated during operation of ICs and capacitors, the solder of the LEDs soldered to the board and the ICs and capacitors that control them may melt, resulting in poor contact.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, since the air blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

The air taken into the rotating unit 500 through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflector 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35(a)) flows to the outside of the rotating unit 500 through the opening (the gap between the opposing surfaces) on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. It is ventilated and released into the atmosphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 35(a)) is caused by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction from the rotation axis. The air is blown to the outside, is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and is released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35(a)).

That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with an open rear side by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outside air taken in through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 is efficiently discharged from the rear side. can be exhausted effectively, thus cooling the heat generated when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are elongated along the diametrical direction in the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is used to push the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation). It can be flowed and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, external air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back side along with the air flow.

That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the blow holes 512 and 522 in the side walls is low (or it cannot be taken in). Take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity, flow the taken in outside air to the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, and exhaust the air from the back side on the outside in the radial direction) can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the air inside the rotating unit 500 is pushed out in the radial direction due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500, the internal pressure on the central side of the rotating unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in through the gaps on the rear side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of the motor 500 and the top base 510 and the bottom base 520 . As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)) curved portion) has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). , the angle of the portion where the air flowed to the longitudinal end portion (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force changes direction toward the rear side becomes a substantially right angle, so a vortex is easily formed at this portion. . Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29(a)) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). curved portion) is formed in a shape curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction. At the same time, the angle of the portion where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. It is possible to suppress the formation of a vortex and make the air flow smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the back side (vertical dimension in FIG. 35(a)) is greater than the distance dimension on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 at the longitudinal end side. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation. By exhausting air from the back side on the radially outward side, when outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, it is possible to take in the air efficiently.

In addition, since the open portion on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decoration portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decoration portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis, the upper surface base 510 In addition, it is possible to suppress disturbance of outside air (formation of flow in the rotational direction) in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 along with the rotation of the lower surface base 520 . As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 .

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape that narrows from the back side toward the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be positioned between the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and rotation transmission unit 570 . Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion of the rotation unit 500 in the left-right direction can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, it can be taken in efficiently. .

Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame body 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame body 610, and a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 .

The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from the lower portion of the inner peripheral edge when viewed from the front, a wall portion 612 protruding radially outward from the side surface of the outer periphery, and a rear side. A fastening hole 613 recessed in a circular shape toward the front side in the edge of the sensor 630 and an opening 614 opening in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 arranged on the back side. be.

In addition, the frame 610 is arranged in the central part of the game board 13 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is a member that can be visually recognized by the player through the glass 8. A pattern or picture is drawn on the front side.

The stage 611 is formed by bending from the lower inner edge of the frame 610 toward the back side, and the upper surface thereof has a first concave portion 611a at the end on the front side and a second concave portion 611a at the end on the back side. The provided portions 611b are respectively recessed.

The stage 611 causes the ball to roll on its upper surface, and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 by utilizing the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which the ball can easily enter the prize winning opening 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of flow-down paths for the balls flowing down the game area, so that the player can be entertained.

The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60). deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for throwing a ball into an opening formed in the rear portion of the center of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and the depth of the recessed portion 611b is formed deeper toward the rear side.

The wall portion 612 is a portion that positions the center frame 600 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is arranged on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts against the front side surface of the base plate 60 . A center frame 600 can be positioned.

The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes recessed in the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from a sensor 630, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing an irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

The center cover 620 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a substantially circular shape in a front view. and a mounting portion 623 protruding outward from the standing tip surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge portion of the cover member 621. be.

The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the rear side (the curved surface is convex on the front side) as it goes outward from the upper center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as "first portion 621a") of the center portion in the left-right direction is positioned forward of left and right ends and lower edge peripheral edges (hereinafter referred to as "second portion").

Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body with a constant thickness, it is possible to prevent it from acting as a convex lens and ensure the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side.

In addition, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third pattern display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for rendering by displacing the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above.

The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion that enables the center cover 620 to be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved toward the rear side as described above, the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the center cover are correspondingly curved. When the distance between the front surface of the frame 620 and the front surface becomes large, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 .

In other words, the vertical dimension of the side wall portion 622 toward the front is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is arranged on the frame 610 . As a result, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are assembled together, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 can be prevented from projecting too far toward the front side of the frame 610 .

The attachment portion 623 is a projection for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame 610, and is formed with a plurality of through holes 623a penetrating in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the rear surface of the frame 610 at the position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, frame 610 and center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the actions of the player, and is composed of a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by an object. and an illumination surface 631 having

The sensor 630 is arranged at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is vertically divided into three equal parts, and is arranged on the right side of the frame 610 . Further, the sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 tilted toward the central front side of the center frame 600 . As a result, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion of the front side of the game board 13 through the glass 8 to the player side.

Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

39(a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view of center frame 600 along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 39(a) and 40(b), the irradiation regions of the light from the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are illustrated as irradiation regions R1 and R2. Also, in FIG. 39(b), the sensor 630 is illustrated by a dashed line. Furthermore, in FIGS. 40(b) and 40(b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be coated is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is arranged forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As shown in FIGS. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via (transmits) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 arranged on the front side. As a result, the sensor 630 can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player's side (front side).

The light irradiated from the sensor 630 is irradiated directly onto the glass 8 from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and emitted from the front side of the glass 8, which is the irradiation region R1, and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The light is reflected and emitted to the area of the irradiation area R2 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 .

Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is arranged in the gaming machine to detect the action of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third pattern display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. And there was a problem of spoiling the interest.

Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening 614 of the frame 610) to the back side (outside), it can be made more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiation surface 631) are placed in front. It becomes difficult to aim toward the target, and the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge of the decorative member (opening of the frame 610), the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is applied to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( player's side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame 610 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is formed as a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position near the sensor 630 is can be made more acute, while the angle of reflection (angle of reflection) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630, so that the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

Further, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (the light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected toward the cover member 621 when irradiated and reflected by the object. In this case, the reflected light travels in different directions depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object. The direction can be the direction of travel toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light reception detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the rear side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610 (FIG. 39 ( b) see). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is disposed at the rear surface of the base plate 60. It is disposed at a position on the back side of the .

As a result, the distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third pattern display device 81 in the upper part of the center frame 600 can be ensured. As a result, it is possible to secure the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced in the vertical direction, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in the limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is arranged.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 (see FIG. 2) of the vertical displacement unit 400 The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, since the second portion 621b is arranged at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 can be used as a light reflecting surface. It can be done easily. In other words, the sensor 630 can be arranged on the far side to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is positioned above the cover member 621, in the store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) is reflected. can be suppressed.

That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved toward the rear side, the light from the fluorescent lamp of the store illuminated from obliquely upward direction is likely to be reflected toward the front side. Since it is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 from deteriorating.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described.

41(a) and 41(b) are sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41(a) shows the rotation unit 500 in its initial position (reference position) (the position in which the extension direction is oriented horizontally), and FIG. 41(b) shows the rotation unit 500 at is rotated by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced so that the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600 are displayed. , a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 facing each other. This allows the rotating unit 500 to rotate without colliding with the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotating member (rotating unit 500) rotates in front of the third pattern display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a wind flow, and the ball flowing down under the influence of the wind is generated. I had a problem with it moving.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind caused by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, The lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame body 610), so that the falling area of the ball and the displacement area of the rotating unit 500 can be separated. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust and dust are blown away by the wind, the blown dust and dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (cover member 621). It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the detection accuracy due to soaring on the route of light emission and light reception.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that the ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall on the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 winds around the front side from the standing tip on the back side erected from the stage 611 or winds on the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13 . , and affects the ball rolling on the stage 611 . On the other hand, in order to eliminate the effect of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage 611, the rear wall is curved to the front side to form a shape that covers the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., forms a closed passage). ), it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is spoiled.

On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is directed to the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). can be blocked by As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, while suppressing the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

Here, if the displacement area where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down area where the ball flows down are partitioned by a partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 In the case 300, many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third pattern display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are arranged, so that heat is dissipated inside the displacement area (back side of the game board 13). ), and the circuit board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed with a predetermined gap from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined space. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from remaining on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 . As a result, colder air on the front side (than on the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third pattern display device 81 are not damaged. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 is formed in the upper part of the center frame 600, the warmed air is supplied to the front side of the game board 13 through the predetermined space. It is easy to flow into. That is, since the air warmed on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, it moves from the predetermined gap between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 to the front side. It can flow easily. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind comes out of the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. It may affect the ball being played.

On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (the area above the opening of the game board 13), It is possible to suppress that the flow of water is affected. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that was shot from the ball shooting unit 112a and flowed into the game area. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of sorting device 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45(a). 45(c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVd-XLVd in FIG.

In FIG. 43, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication holes 751, and the recovery holes 752 are illustrated with broken lines. In addition, in FIG. 45(d), the path of the ball that is dispensed from the opening 744 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 43). It mainly includes a side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 .

The front side forming portion 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 730 .

The back side forming portion 720 is mainly formed by an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 arranged on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

The prize winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described first prize winning port 64 positioned at the upper center in the left-right direction, and a first electric accessory 640a positioned below the first prize winning port 64. , a through-hole 731 located on both sides of the first electric accessory 640a in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through-hole 731 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. , is formed mainly with.

The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper projecting portion 741 of a bending member 740, which will be described later, is inserted. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the rear surface to the front surface.

Two protruding walls 731a are arranged side by side symmetrically about the center line of the through hole 731 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the protruding distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, the ball passing (rolling) inside the through hole 731 by the interposing member 750 and the distributing member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is guided from the back side to the front side. rolled towards the side.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 . The lower insertion hole 732 has a generally D-shaped opening with a curved lower surface when viewed from the front. and a second projecting portion 732b.

The first projecting portion 732a is formed such that the projecting distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45(a)) toward the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45(a)). The second protruding portion 732b is formed so that the protruding distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance dimension between the opposing first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the inclination of the second projecting portion 732b from the front side to the back side allows the ball to roll to the back side. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first projecting portion 732a.

A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732 . The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than that of a sphere. can detect the passage of The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the circular arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 . As a result, the opening direction of the through-hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the rear side, so that the sphere passing through the through-hole of the sensor SE can be prevented from remaining inside the through-hole.

The bending member 740 is a member that is arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is positioned substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. are arranged symmetrically, and the external shape thereof is formed symmetrically.

In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough for a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. As a result, the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is prevented from remaining in the game area by being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 .

The bending member 740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the rear surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposed lower protrusions 743 .

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 . As a result, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 , the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 . Therefore, when arranging the bending member 740 to the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted for positioning, so the assembling process can be simplified.

In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape whose lower side is open when viewed from the rear, when the ball is passed through the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 and rolled toward the bending member 740, the ball can be pushed. A connection portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the . Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731 . That is, when a connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball bounces on the steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the ball and suppress the clogging of the ball.

Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in a rear view and the ball is passed through the inside of the annular ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the shape of the bending member 740 is complicated due to the formation of the upper projection 741 in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, so the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in a rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second ball throwing path KR2”) for throwing a ball that is thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. ), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The projection distance of the lower projecting portion 743 toward the rear side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the prize winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the prize winning member 730 . Therefore, the distance between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 facing each other is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (referred to as "first ball throwing path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 protruding from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.

The guide part 742 is a projecting wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction, and then throws the ball to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. , and the height in the vertical direction of the lower inner edge is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the rear surface.

Two guide portions 742 are formed symmetrically about the center line in the horizontal direction of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side in a front view. As a result, the sphere is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742, so that the sphere can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The protruding tip surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the mutually facing surfaces (see FIG. 45(b)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the sphere that is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The upper projecting portion 741 is formed with sidewalls 741a that project inward from the left and right side surfaces in a rear view. A plurality of side walls 741a (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 in the normal state rolls in the horizontal direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the thrown ball. On the other hand, when two balls continuously flow inside the upper protruding portion 741, and the ball flowing behind collides with the ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, thereby It is possible to prevent the balls from being clogged inside the upper protruding portion 741 by securing a distance for escaping in the direction. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball thrown inside the upper projecting portion 741. As shown in FIG.

The openings 744 are predetermined gaps formed between the upper projecting portion 741 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other, and are formed on both left and right sides in a rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on the rear side in a side view.

The upper end of the opening 744 is set at substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is approximately midway in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. is set to the height of As a result, when the balls are successively thrown into the bending member 740 , it is possible to prevent the preceding balls from escaping into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740 . That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the left-right side surface of the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward to both the left and right sides from a center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a seesaw member 762 arranged in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper side of the seesaw member 762. and a ball feed port 763 formed in the .

The ball feed port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760 , and is formed at a position facing the first prize winning port 64 of the prize winning member 730 . As a result, when the distribution member 760 is arranged in an interposition member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feed port 763 and the interposition member 750 facing each other.

The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the ball (i.e., a space through which the ball can pass), and the first prize winning opening of the prize winning member 730 through a through hole drilled in the base plate 60. It is connected with the internal space of 64 (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball that wins the first prize winning opening 64 can be thrown into the space A, and the ball can be thrown inside the space A. - 特許庁

The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a protruding outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. and a portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inside of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposition member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is thrown in the opposite direction. That is, the ball thrown from the space A can be thrown in the horizontal direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes causes the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion to be displaced in the direction in which the seesaw member 762 is positioned. The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761 is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the protrusion 762a that is displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761, thereby restricting the displacement.

Inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throwing path KR3”) along which the balls distributed to the left and right by seesaw member 762 are rolled and thrown. It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

The inclined surface 761 is inclined toward the insertion member 750 at the end on the lower side so that the thickness of the side surface on the back side increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof can be thrown to the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged in front of the sorting member 760 .

The intervening member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. and a collection hole 752 that opens below the hole 751 .

The communication holes 751 are formed on the front side of the right and left end portions of the distribution member 760 and formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 . Therefore, the spaces at the right and left end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication holes 751 . Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as "fourth ball throwing route KR4"). ) can be formed.

The recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown to the opening of the recovery hole 752 . The recovery hole 752 is connected to a ball circulation device installed in the store, and the balls recovered to the recovery hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out from the ball shooting unit 112a again as game balls. .

The sorting device 700 configured as described above throws balls as follows. A ball entering from the first winning hole 64 is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown by a seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction. When the ball thrown through the third ball path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball path KR3, it reaches the fourth ball path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown. A ball thrown through the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740 . A ball thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower projecting portion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. A ball that is thrown through the second ball-throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize-winning member 730 and the inside of the sensor SE, and then is thrown to the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 3750 .

Here, as described above, the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right. The first electric accessory 640a is positioned between the lower protruding portions 743 of the bending member 740 of .

In this case, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743 . On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased, and ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) increases, making it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 from occurring. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction required for disposing the third ball throwing route KR3 (distribution member 760) can be reduced, and the first electric accessory 640a can be disposed. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a is impossible with the conventional product, and is possible only by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower projecting portion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

Here, in this embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for a larger size of the third pattern display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also become larger. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the play area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third ball throwing path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. was difficult.

That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third throwing path KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steeper), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased, making it difficult for the ball to clog the lower protruding portion 743. The space in the height direction required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 increases, making it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the two, and it becomes necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring in the lower protruding portion 743. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of the 3-throwing path KR3 (gentle descending inclination). As a result, since the arrangement position in the height direction (vertical direction) of the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) can be raised (higher), the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) and the game area (lower inner edge of the inner rail 61), a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide the first outlets 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is This arrangement is impossible with the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower projecting portion 743 as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the ball throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 46(a) corresponds to FIG. 45(a), and FIG. 46(b) corresponds to FIG. 45(b).

As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 with almost no gap (that is, two balls in a row), the previous (preceding) ball is thrown. A portion of the ball enters the opening 744 and is fed to the rear side and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 .

Here, if a passage with a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed, and the passage is curved, two spheres can be placed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected to each other). ) When a ball is thrown, the preceding ball hits the trailing ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, making it impossible for both to roll, resulting in ball jamming. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, when a plurality of balls pass through the lower projecting portion 743 in a row, Even if the trailing ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is possible to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall, and to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect, it is possible to prevent the ball from being easily clogged at the bent portion. That is, in the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed (dropped) down the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and rolls toward the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the ball starts to move, and the trailing ball can easily catch up with the leading ball. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the intersection of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2. The ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) to make it difficult to press against the side wall, making it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

Furthermore, as described above, since the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the approximately middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730, the ball falls (flows down) along the first throwing path KR1. When the ball to be played reaches the bottom wall of the second ball-throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 to be less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, the lower projecting portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the side, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower projecting portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A sidewall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second ball throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. can be suppressed.

In this case, if the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening 744 can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. A configuration is formed in which the leading ball pushes the leading ball toward the center of the opening 744 , and the leading ball may be nested within the opening 744 . In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening 744, and ball clogging occurs.

On the other hand, since the opening 744 is made larger than the outer shape of the sphere (it is formed in a size that allows the sphere to pass through), a configuration is formed in which the trailing sphere presses the leading sphere toward the center of the opening 744 . Even if it is done, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Also, in this way, the opening 744 is formed with a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening 744 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the ball flows down the game area. A ball can flow into the flexure member 740 through the opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the lower projecting portion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower projecting portion 743, the bending member A ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (the area where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, so the flow from the opening 744 to the bending member 740 is provided. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, also from this point, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion curved downward toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed in the region where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect. As a result, when the ball flowing down (falling) down the first ball-throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second ball-throwing path KR2, the ball is moved to the downward slope of the guide part 742. can be used to move quickly. As a result, the leading ball can be easily rolled before the trailing ball catches up with it, and the trailing ball rolls the trailing ball to the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the rear side when rolling, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at the curved portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. When this happens, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

Furthermore, when dust or debris accumulates in the curved portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. to allow cleaning of the flexure through opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Next, the luminous decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 . 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the luminous decoration unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47, the luminous decoration unit 800 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 810 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base body 810 on the front side of the base body 810. It mainly includes a light-emitting device 820 to be provided and a cover member 830 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 820 and made of a light-transmitting material.

On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

Next, a regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 48 and 49, the overall configuration of regulation unit 2490 will be described. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment. 49(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49(c) is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 2490;

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment, a roller member 492 is pivotally supported by a rotating member 2494 so that the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by rotating the rotating member 2494. be.

The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493. It mainly includes a rotating member 2494 that is clamped and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 .

The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and is formed to have a width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49(b)) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly formed with a protruding portion 491a that protrudes from the side surface on the front side, and cutout portions 2491b that are cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

The notch portion 2491b is cut out in a semicircular shape at approximately the center position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49(b)) of both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 49(b)). be. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494 to be described later therein, and its inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494 .

The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491 . The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491 . In addition, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 2493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 2493a. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492 . Therefore, the rotation member 2494 can be rotatably disposed in the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotation member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the concave portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491 facing each other.

The rotating member 2494 is formed of an oblong plate-like body in a side view, and its longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491 . The rotating member 2494 has a cylindrical shaft portion 2494b projecting outward in the left-right direction from the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction; and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the projecting tip portion of the portion 2494b.

The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the tip of the protruding portion. Accordingly, by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and arranging the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the rear side, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition, the rotation member 2494 can be regulated from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the regulating portion 2494c.

The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 from which the retaining ring E1 has been removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 onto the shaft portion 492b. can be disposed on the rotating member 2494 at .

The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

First, the shaft portions 492b of the roller members 492 are inserted into the shaft support holes 2494a of the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair, and the roller members 492 are supported by the rotating members 2494. As shown in FIG. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged vertically in parallel between the opposing rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

Next, after disposing a torsion spring (not shown) on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 and fitting it in the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the rear side, thereby rotating the spring. The member 2494 can be arranged rotatably with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, by rotationally displacing the rotating member 2494, the position of the roller member 492 arranged on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced. In addition, the roller member 492 arranged above the roller members 492 arranged vertically is biased toward the front side (left side in FIG. 49(c)) by the torsion spring arranged on the shaft portion 2494b. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50(a) to (c) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50(a) corresponds to FIG. 24(a), FIG. 50 to FIG. 24(b), and FIG. 21(c) to FIG. 18(c).

As shown in FIG. 50(a), when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is pulled by a torsion spring (not shown) provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. As shown in FIG. is rotated so that the roller member 492 arranged above the roller member 492 arranged on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. , the roller 492a of the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 and exerts a lower pressure on the decorative member 450 than the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, so that the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(b) to the first position shown in FIG. 50(c), a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450 It is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor 441 that is driven.

Further, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position as shown in FIG. As a result, the roller member 492 on the lower side is pushed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the roller 492a on the upper side is displaced to the front side. As a result, the pressing force of the upper roller 492a against the decorative member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced to facilitate displacement. That is, as the decorative member 450 is displaced, the pressing force applied from the regulation unit 2490 to the decorative member 450 can be changed.

Next, a sorting device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the overall configuration of sorting device 3700 will be described. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIa-LIIIa line in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIb-LIIIb line in FIG. 52(b). .

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 , in the sorting device 3700 of the third embodiment, the opening of the second prize winning port 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700 .

The sorting device 3700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and has a front side formation portion 3710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and a rear side with respect to the base plate 60. and a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

The front side forming portion 3710 mainly includes a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 3730 .

The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the rear side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member positioned below the distribution member 760. 3750 and a second ball feeding path 3770 disposed on the back side of the ball 3750.

The prize winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described first prize winning port 64 at the upper center in the left-right direction. A through hole 731 is formed through both sides of the accessory 640a in the left and right direction, a second through hole 3733 is formed through the through hole 731 in the front and rear direction, and a second through hole 3733 is formed below the through hole 3733. and a lower insertion hole 732 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second prize winning opening 640, and a second protruding wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface so as to protrude upward from the back side to the front side. .

Two second protruding walls 3733a are arranged side by side symmetrically with respect to the center line of the second through hole 3733 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the protruding distance thereof is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, when a ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the later-described intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding passage, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 3730, and is provided on both the left and right sides of the second prize winning port 640. The pair of external shapes are formed symmetrically.

The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the back side, an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741. and a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below 3745 .

The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is elongated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) when viewed from the rear, and is formed on both the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. It is formed at the same height as the approximately middle position of the through hole 3733 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protruding portion 3745 is positioned below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733 .

A second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741 facing each other. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other.

The second opening 3746 has a substantially U-shape opening on the rear side in a side view, and the inner shape thereof is formed to be larger than the outer shape of a sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the sphere to pass through. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be given later.

The second ball feed path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with a constant thickness and an open front side. The second ball-throwing path 3770 is a ball-throwing path for throwing a ball that enters the second winning port 640 to the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is arranged on the back side of the interposing member 3750. , a ball-throwing passage can be formed between the inner side of the second ball-throwing passage 3770 and the interposing member 3750 .

The second ball feed path 3770 has a left end located on the back side of the second prize winning opening 640 of the prize winning member 3730 when viewed from the front, and a right end of the second ball feeding path 3770 located in the second through hole of the prize winning member 3730. 3733 is located on the back side. That is, the second ball feed path 3770 is arranged in the interposition member 3750 such that the left end in a front view is positioned higher than the right end and tilts downward toward the right end.

Further, the second ball feed path 3770 has a left end connected to the second prize winning port 640 in a front view, and a right end connected to the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 . As a result, the ball that has entered the second winning hole 640 is thrown into the second ball-throwing path 3770, and then rolls inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is thrown to the second connecting hole 3753 of the setting member 3750 .

The intervening member 3750 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and communication holes 751 located on both left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and formed through in the front-rear direction. a recovery hole 752 positioned below the communication hole 751 and penetrating in the longitudinal direction, and a second connecting hole 3753 positioned between the right communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 and penetrating in the longitudinal direction. and .

The second connecting hole 3753 is formed to have a generally rectangular shape in a front view. . As a result, the ball rolling inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 described above passes through the second connecting hole 3753 and is thrown to the second through-hole 3733 of the interposing member 750 .

The sorting device 3700 configured as described above throws balls as follows. A ball entering from the first winning hole 64 is thrown to a sorting member 760 and alternately thrown to either one of the left and right inclined surfaces 761 by a seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 . When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is sent to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side, and reaches the back side of the bending member 740. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown to the back side of bending member 740, 3740 is guided along the protruding tip end surface of guide part 742 of bending member 740, 3740 and drops downward, and also passes through lower insertion hole 732 of winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the interposing member 3750 .

A ball entering from the second winning hole 640 is thrown to the second ball-throwing path 3770, and is thrown inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball that is thrown to the right end of the second ball-throwing path 3770 passes through the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passes through the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, it falls downward while being guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 3730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and then intervenes. The ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750 .

Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, the ball entering from the second prize winning port 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the prize winning member 3730 when viewed from the front. There is no need to dispose the sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE for detecting the ball entering from the first winning hole 64 can also serve as the sensor SE for detecting the ball entering the second winning hole 640, so the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. can.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, second opening 3746 of bending member 3740 will be described. (a) and (b) of FIG. 54 are sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54(a) corresponds to FIG. 53(a), and FIG. 54(b) corresponds to FIG. 53(b).

As shown in FIG. 54 , a ball enters from the first winning hole 64 and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 , and a ball enters from the second winning hole 640 and is thrown from the bending member 3740 . If the balls that are thrown to the back side are thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and become jammed.

That is, the ball that is thrown from the second prize winning port 640 and fed from the second through hole 3733 of the prize winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as the “lower ball”) passes through the first prize winning port 64. The ball is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 3730, and collides with the ball falling from above to below the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as "upper ball"). , there is a danger that the ball will get stuck and get stuck by being caught on the front side end of the second through hole 3733 .

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper ball is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the opposing second openings 3746, thereby allowing the lower ball to move. and the ball on the upper side can be eliminated to prevent the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740 .

That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the lateral side surface where the upper sphere is positioned, and the upper spheres Since the spherical shape leans on either the left or the right, the upper sphere is sent to the inside of the second opening 3744 on either the left or right. As a result, the balance between the lower sphere and the upper sphere can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of balls in the ball feed path of the bending member 3740 .

Next, referring to FIG. 55, a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

55(a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55(a). (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 55(b). In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), the passing path through which the ball passes is schematically illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize winning opening that is located outside and below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 55(a)). 4063 is provided.

The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 . The winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, on the back side thereof, and a ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

The recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 4750 is formed by bending downward at the tip of the second ball throwing path KR2, and a path (sixth ball throwing path KR6) through which the ball passes and is thrown downward is formed. be. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

A third connecting hole 4752a projecting to both the left and right sides is formed in the sixth ball throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the lower part of the third connecting hole 4752a.

The third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the open portion of the winning opening 4063 on the back side. As a result, the ball that has entered the prize winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connecting hole 4752a and is thrown to the sixth ball path.

A sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6 is arranged on the passage of the third connecting hole 4752a. As a result, it is possible to detect the ball that has entered the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a.

As a result, the ball ejected from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can enter the winning opening 4063 . That is, the ball guided by the bending member 740 not only passes through the sensor SE, but also flows out from the opening 744 into the game area. It is possible to form a passing form and add interest to the game.

In addition, the winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 into the game area. some balls may be placed in unacceptable positions.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the balls that are likely to be clogged can be put out from the opening into the game area, thereby making the first ball-throwing passage KR1. and the second ball throwing route KR2.

Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the ball paid out from the opening 744 enters the winning opening 4063. It is possible to easily impart interest to the player.

Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning hole 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged on the third connecting hole 4752a. Instead, it passes through the sensor SE located on the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, the ball entering from the prize winning opening 4063 can pass through the two sensors, so that the player can be entertained.

In addition, since the balls thrown to the bending member 740 are sorted to the left and right one by one by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball from clogging the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is arranged on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically about the center line of the center frame 600 in the horizontal direction. More than two sensors 630 may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be arranged on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400 . In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a convex curved surface on the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the central portion on the front side. Alternatively, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 should be reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 serves both to make the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side and to serve as the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although it has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects the light emitted from the sensor 630. You can divide the area into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40(b), and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has second regions R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56), and center sides (third pattern display devices) of the second regions R2 at both ends. 81) is provided with a first region R1.

The first region R1 is a region where the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be visually recognized by the player, and is formed of a light-transmitting material with a relatively high degree of transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side of the gaming machine 13 (toward the player). The boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 should be visible to the player positioned on the front side of the gaming machine 13. Identical positions are preferred. In addition, in this modified example, the sensors 630 are arranged at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

In this case, for example, the back side or the front side of the second region R2 may be coated with a member having a high reflectance such as silver foil. Alternatively, a silver sticker may be attached to the back side or front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may have a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the cover member 621, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be set. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Furthermore, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting through the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

In each embodiment described above, the two inclined surfaces 761 (third ball throwing path KR3) of the distribution member 760 are formed to have the same length. 761 (third throwing path KR3) may have different lengths. In this case, the time required for the sensor SE to detect each ball sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 720 can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be entertained.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be made of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a uniform thickness. However, the thickness of the cover member 621 may be varied. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

In the first embodiment, the elastic deformation of the roller 492a is used to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. It is not limited to this, and may utilize the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is displaceable, and the roller 492a is displaced to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. good.

In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. For example, it can be formed from a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the above-described third embodiment, the upper roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 before the lower roller 492a. The roller 492a that is placed on the lower side may contact the decorative member 450 later than the roller 492a that is placed on the lower side.

For example, the roller 492a arranged above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are spaced apart from each other) is positioned between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the front-rear direction (FIG. 50). It may be configured to provide a predetermined gap in (a) the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed compared to the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. Gaps may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to prevent air from staying (accumulating) inside the irradiation hole 543 . That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the surface roughening is formed in an uneven shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the surface roughening may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions). , a surface consisting only of recesses (hollows). The roughening may also extend as striations or grooves. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be circular, keyed, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, and a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is distributed to the displacement area of the rotation unit 500. It may be introduced into (rotating area). That is, the space between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620) may be filled with smoke. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while allowing smoke to pass through, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. In addition, while the rotating unit 500 or its rear side member is hidden by the smoke (while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize), only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized. Therefore, the production effect of the LED 532 (light) can be enhanced.

In the conventional product, it was difficult to keep the above-mentioned space filled with smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the rotation unit rotated. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain a smoke effect. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper base 510 and the lower base 520, and the rear surface of the structure assembled with the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is arranged. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the space described above can be filled with smoke (stayed around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in a smoke-filled atmosphere, and the effects described above can be achieved.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Cover 620 as an Example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by an object of the light. and a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the sensor device is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front side is formed as a convex curved surface, and is made of a light transmissive material A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a front member consisting of.

Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object (for example, a player's hand) that emits light and emits light 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light (eg, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is visibly exposed to the player, the player loses interest. Therefore, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device detects the existence of an object by emitting light and receiving the light reflected by the object through the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The further apart (backward) the sensor device is arranged from the decorative member, the less likely it is to be visually recognized by the player, but the narrower the range in which the object can be detected becomes, and the sensor device becomes closer to the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is arranged, the wider the detectable range of the object becomes, but the more likely it is to be visually recognized by the player. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and is provided with a front member made of a light transmissive material, light is emitted from the sensor device. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be arranged away from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), so that the sensor device is difficult for the player to visually recognize and the object can be detected. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is made more acute at a position closer to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, so that the detectable range of the object can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected in front of the front member.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. can be suppressed, and the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine A2, a displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member that is closer to the front than the second portion. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is disposed at a position where

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the front member is arranged at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second portion, so that the game can be played. The first portion can be used as a passage for the displacement member to be displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is positioned closer to the back side than the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased accordingly in a limited space.

The first part of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the game board, and the second part of the front member is positioned closer to the rear surface of the game board. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position on the back side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be suppressed more reliably, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position closer to the back than the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be illuminated accordingly. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

In the game machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at the inner edge of the opening of the game board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the game board and the back side of the front member. and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the rear side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The second portion (the front member) can block the wind generated by this. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust is blown away by the wind, the second portion (the front member) can block the blown dust and dust.・It is possible to suppress the deterioration of detection accuracy due to flying up on the light path of light reception.

In the gaming machine A5, the center frame has a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second part of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage of the center frame is provided with a rear wall so that the ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the rear side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member winds around the rear wall standing from the stage toward the front side, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. to affect the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to eliminate the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage, if the rear wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., form a closed passage). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest in the game is lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the second part of the front member is connected to the range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotary member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, while suppressing the influence of the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

In the game machine A5 or A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or center frame of the opening of the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in either the game machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged with a predetermined gap between the inner edge of the opening of the game board or the center frame. , the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through such a predetermined space. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be suppressed from remaining on the back side of the game board and the front member.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, so that the rotating member can be rotated. The wind generated in can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (area above the opening of the game board), and the flow of the ball can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that has been launched from the launcher and flowed into the game area. Compared to a moving ball, it is less affected by the wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member), the air warmed by the heat rises. A gap (predetermined gap) that is formed in the area, that is, allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate can be formed higher up. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) is made easier to flow to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, thereby preventing heat buildup on the back side of the game board and the front member. can be suppressed.

A game machine A9 in any one of the game machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least with respect to the horizontal direction.

Here, since the front member is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it almost faces the player's face (faces the face directly). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from the fluorescent lamps installed on the ceiling of the store or from other gaming machines is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzled. There is a risk that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device will be degraded (the liquid crystal display device will become difficult to see due to the reflection of light from fluorescent lamps and other game machines on the front member).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the deterioration of the visibility of the liquid crystal display device.

In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of approximately A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is set to a constant value and that the horizontal component increases toward the front located vertically upward.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion where the can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is transferred to the first part of the front member (the game board and the gap (predetermined )) to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Sorting Device 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion being formed in a part of said passage member, said passage member having an opening formed in a side wall of said bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position at which the ball flows out from the path to the game area), so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the above-described conventional game machine, the flow of the balls in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the bent portion, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

In the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage, and the opening extends in the vertical direction. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is formed in an area where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage. , and since the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the position where the ball that has flowed down (dropped) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage. It is easy for the ball following the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur. On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, even if the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is pushed to the side wall. It is possible to make it difficult to press and make it easy to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extension path intersect, and is formed in the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension path. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extended path Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, it is difficult to press the trailing ball against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the game machine B3, the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the back side when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended path A game machine B4 is characterized in that a side wall of the game machine B4 is formed with an inclined surface inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extension passage.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, along the extension direction of the bottom wall and the extension path that will be the rolling surface When the ball rolls, the side wall on the back side forms an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage, so the ball flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes direction. When the ball starts rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. As a result, the leading ball can be easily rolled before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball causes the trailing ball to roll on the back side (along the extending direction of the extending passage). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the back side when rolling, it is possible to make it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The slope of the inclined surface may be a straight slope, a curved slope, or a combination of these slopes. In addition, the downward inclination angle of the inclined surface need not be greater than the downward inclination angle of the extended passage over the entire inclined surface. The point is that it is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the passage.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the front side of a board.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) of the bent portion of the path member ) is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a clogged ball occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the glass plate can be opened to remove the clogged ball from the bent part on the front side of the game board. can be accessed through an opening to the Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and is positioned at a height corresponding to the radius of a ball from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A game machine B6 characterized by being formed in a range including.

According to the game machine B6, in any of the game machines B2 to B5, the opening is the side wall in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the ball from the bottom wall that serves as the rolling surface. Since it is formed in a range that includes the height position where the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A game machine B7 is arranged on the front side of a board, and the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

According to the game machine B7, in any one of the game machines B2 to B6, at least a region (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) where at least the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect among the bent portions of the passage member is used for the game. Since it is arranged on the front side of the board and the opening is formed in a size that allows the balls to pass through, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, if the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. Forms may be formed that push the preceding ball into the center of the opening, causing the preceding ball to be nested (snapped) into the opening. In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening, and ball clogging occurs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B7, even if the following ball pushes the preceding ball toward the center of the opening, the preceding ball is pushed from the opening to the outside of the passage member (the front side of the game board). game area), and it is possible to avoid that the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be prevented. It can flow into the passage member through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the bend, in addition to the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the upstream of the bend, the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the opening are also used as winning holes. can be detected. Especially in this case, since the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

In the game machine 7, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extended passage A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall of the Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

In game machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed so as to slope downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center of the game area in the width direction and the bent portion is positioned outside the game area in the width direction. A game machine B9 characterized in that a winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

According to the game machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent portion in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the balls will be low, and ball clogging will easily occur at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to clog in the bent portion. The downward slope can be gradual). As a result, the space in the height direction required for arranging the inclined passage can be reduced, and it is possible to arrange the winning device. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the prize winning device described in the game machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible in the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

In the game machine B9, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical path and the extended path intersect is located on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member that is disposed on the front side of the game board and the lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by:

Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board has also become larger, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area has become narrower. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to dispose the passage member and the member corresponding to the winning device described in the game machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the balls becomes low, and ball clogging easily occurs at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device. In addition, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Out ports must be provided on both sides.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the bent portion. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be made small (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the bent portion can be raised (raised), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide outlets on both sides of the bent portion. In other words, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9 is further combined with the arrangement described in the game machine B10 (the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). is an arrangement that is not possible with conventional products, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the body member; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a plurality of through holes penetrating through a side wall facing in the direction of rotation.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968).

In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting means is exposed, the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Thus, the luminous means are not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light-emitting means is arranged is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, a similar display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotating display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably pivotally supported by a base member. publicly known). According to this, since the light-emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, the light-emitting means is difficult to be visually recognized, and the appearance is not spoiled. In addition, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light-emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem was found in that it is difficult to cool the light-emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs and capacitors that control them are soldered to the substrate. , may cause poor contact.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the main body member has a plurality of through holes penetratingly formed in the side wall facing the rotation direction, when the main body member is rotated, the main body member passes through the plurality of through holes. outside air can be taken into the inside of the Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side open, so that outside air taken in from the through-hole of the side wall is efficiently taken in from the back side. can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

In the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is inclined toward the longitudinal end side. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, by utilizing the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and be exhausted from the rear side. Therefore, along with the air flow, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and near the rotating shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low around the rotating shaft and its vicinity, outside air is not taken in efficiently (or cannot be taken in) from the through-hole of the side wall. outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken outside air is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, forming a flow of air that is exhausted from the rear side on the outside side in the radial direction). be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the rotating shaft and the light emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof.

In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the main body member (i.e., if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), centrifugal force causes the longitudinal ends (during rotation Since the angle of the portion where the air flowed radially outward) changes direction toward the rear side is approximately a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the rear side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the longitudinal end side, so that the centrifugal force causes the longitudinal end side (during rotation) The angle of the portion where the air flowing radially outward) can be gradually flowed to the back side, and the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle, the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed, and the air can flow smoothly. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the rotating shaft and the light-emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft that is larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft, which is larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. is also increased, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation is used to flow the air inside the body member to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation), and from the rear side on the radially outward side By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, it can be taken in efficiently.

The gaming machine C5 of the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the main body member is formed such that the rotation axis and the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation axis are formed in a circle concentric with the rotation axis. It is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of flow in the rotating direction) accompanying the rotation of the rotating shaft. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member that rotatably supports the body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter that decreases from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity as the body member rotates, the outside air can flow smoothly along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be achieved more reliably.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is housed in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characterized game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the board is arranged such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to that surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed in the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor, thereby enhancing the heat radiation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor operates. In addition, when the board is housed in the main body member, the front or back surface of the board faces the side wall of the main body member. ) can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices arranged on the back side thereof.

A gaming machine C8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it comprises smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, the smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device is provided, so that the flashing of the light emitting means can be highlighted. can be done. In addition, while the rotating display device is hidden by the smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be seen, so that the presentation effect of the light can be enhanced.

In a conventional rotating display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, making it difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. is formed and outside air can be circulated so that the smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above effects can be achieved.

As a smoke generator, for example, a type that heats and vaporizes water-based or oil-based oil (liquid) to generate smoke (smoke). Examples include a type that retains fine particles and a type that ejects carbon dioxide gas.

In the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a liquid crystal display device arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting on the front side a front member formed in a curved shape and made of a light-transmitting material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotating display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a front side of the liquid crystal display device a front member disposed on the side of the liquid crystal display device and formed to be convexly curved toward the front side and made of a light-transmitting material; at least the main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to make the blinking of the light-emitting means stand out in an atmosphere filled with smoke, or to make only the blinking of the light-emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with the smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the above-described lighting effect using smoke.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
a base member; a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member; In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced while being placed at the first position, a rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the body member, and the body member being placed at the first position. an abutting member facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being held so as to be able to abut on the other of the base member and the main body member, wherein the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

A base member, a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the body member, wherein the body member is A game machine is known in which a displacement member is formed to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, JP-A-2013-162990).

In this case, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress the looseness. The engaging means includes an engaging member disposed on one of the body member and the base member and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be engageable with the engaging member and attached to the other of the body member and the base member. and an engaged member disposed thereon, utilizing the displacement of the body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position) to retract the engaging member while resisting the biasing force of the biasing means. When the member is placed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the body member from the first position toward the second position), the body member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. There is a problem that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and the driving force required to displace the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the main body member contacting the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being arranged at the first position. and an abutment member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to face each other. The displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. In this case, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotary member are set substantially parallel. When the body member is displaced to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

The game machine D2 in the game machine D1 is characterized in that at least the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In some cases, the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member by elastically deforming the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided, loosening of fastening portions, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (e.g., rotated at relatively high speeds to function as a versawriter), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are transmitted from the body member to the base member. , it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be radially displaceable, and one of the base member and the main body member rotates the rotating member while the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D3, characterized by comprising a facing member arranged to face the abutting member on both sides thereof and facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut thereon.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member is arranged at the first position. In this state, the body member is arranged to face the contact member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and the opposing member faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface of the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

Examples of a configuration in which the rotating member is radially displaceable include a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is radially displaceable, and a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is configured to be radially displaceable. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft that is fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the through hole of either the body member or the base member that receives the shaft and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body with an annular cross-section having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The game machine D4 is characterized in that the displacement of the rotating member in the radial direction is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotary member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member If the rotating member is caught between the contacting member and the opposing member due to rattling of the member, the contacting member and the opposing member can be rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). This makes it easier to hold the member more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It need not be formed as a shaft and can be formed as a shaft that is fixed to one of the base member or the body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, a pair of the rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members rotate when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members are arranged so that the main body member is the first. Since they are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the direction of displacement when they are arranged at one position, the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the member with respect to the base member.

That is, since the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, but only one rotating member is abutted by the abutting member. In such a case, the rotation of the rotating member may cause the contact member to tilt, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member may cause rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined spacing, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations with a predetermined spacing. Therefore, the rotating member can be contacted without being rotated, and tilting of the contact member can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the contact member is provided on a side of a contact surface with which the rotating member contacts, which receives the rotating member when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed at an end portion thereof, the inclined surface being inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the abutment member can be set to the first position when the body member of the abutment surface with which the rotating member abuts is arranged at the first position. Since an inclined surface is formed at the end on the side of receiving the rotating member, the inclined surface is inclined downward as the body member is moved away from the contact surface. A rotating member can be guided to the abutment surface of the abutment member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position.

A gaming machine D7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotary member is arranged on the base member, and the abutment member is arranged on the main body member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively light. Since there is no need to dispose a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacing the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when suppressing rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the body member on the vibration source side can be reduced, making it easier to suppress the rattling.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the abutment surface of the abutment member that abuts on the rotation member. and the rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is aligned with the rotation member of the contact member. Since the abutment surface to be abutted and the rotation axis of the rotating member are substantially parallel to each other, the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position and when displacing it from the first position to the second position While suppressing this, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

That is, since the displacement mode of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts on the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession motion of the displacement member (the motion in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that makes it vibrate. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, respectively, so that the contact surface of the contact member is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from any direction. As a result, when the body member is arranged at the first position and when the body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for displacing the body member. The contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member effectively suppresses rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D8, the game machine comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace the main body member between the first position and the second position, a crank member having a rotating body rotated about a first axis by the driving force of the driving means and a pin projecting from the rotating body eccentrically from the first axis of the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove in which it slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate around the second shaft, and the main body member moves along with the rotation. and an arm member to be displaced, and when the main body member is arranged at the first position, a straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member. The game machine D9 is characterized by being substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the crank member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotary member is likely to rotate in this direction. It becomes difficult to exhibit the effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D9, when the body member is arranged at the first position, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member tries to rotate the arm member due to its displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead center can be formed. That is, rattling of the body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. As a result, even when the body member rattles in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member tends to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead point. can effectively suppress rattling of the body member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Regulation Unit 490 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a main body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, which is the surface of the main body member. The game machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968). However, in the conventional technology described above, the orientation of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the orientation of the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means faces the front side (player side)). (parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (rotational axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotary display device is hindered when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. Since the substrate is accommodated in the body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the body member, the outer shape of the body member when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (body member) is stopped, the visibility of the rear side of the body member can be improved.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the rotating display device comprises a facing member arranged to face the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the rotating display device includes the opposing member arranged opposite to the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is oriented such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (blinking) of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage can be displayed by the afterimage effect. can be done.

In the game machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses formed in a surface facing the substrate and extending in a groove-like shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses that are recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extend in the shape of a groove substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. , and since the plurality of light emitting means are opposed to the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of recesses of the facing member to the front side (game person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being divided by each concave portion, the division of light from each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the contour of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions an edge on the opposite side of the front side of the rotary display device.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions the end on the side opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light irradiated to the concave portion of the facing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is positioned to face the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at a position facing the wall, the end partition wall can be irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A game machine E6 in any one of the game machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member is formed as an uneven surface.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is partially formed as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be diffusely reflected by the uneven surface and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being viewed in a biased state in a part of the opening.

In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions) or a surface consisting only of depressions (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as striations or grooves. Moreover, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be circular, elliptical, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end portion of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is: A gaming machine E7 characterized by being formed as a surface smoother than the uneven surface.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end on the front side of the rotary display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. You can increase the light intensity. That is, when an uneven surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member on the front side of the rotary display device, the uneven surface diffusely reflects the light, and the light is diffusely reflected on the front side of the rotary display device ( The light emitted toward the player's side) is reduced, but by making the inner surface of such a predetermined range smoother than the uneven surface, irregular reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotating display device is reduced. It is possible to increase the amount of light directed toward (the player's side).

In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. E8.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the concave-convex surface is not formed increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. (that is, the diameter is expanded), the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be spread. In other words, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the recesses of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the uneven surface arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member A gaming machine E9 characterized in that the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the uneven surface is arranged, the more the main body Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the visually recognized brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to have a higher brightness (brighter) than the light from the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased as the uneven surface disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction outward. , the concave portion (light emitting means) located radially outwardly away from the rotating shaft of the main body member, the diffused reflection due to the uneven surface is increased (that is, the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means is decreased). , can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In any one of game machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided to cover the end portion of the recess of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the cover member includes , a game machine E10 characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end portion of the recess.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover is provided to cover the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A member is provided, and the cover member has an uneven surface formed at least in the area facing the end of the recess. ) can be emitted. That is, since the emitted light can be spread, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member is interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the intervening member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions. A gaming machine E11 characterized by comprising a through hole formed through at a position through which the game machine E11 passes.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like intervening member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the intervening member includes a plurality of Since the through-holes are provided at positions through which the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are communicated, the light from each light-emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding recesses, and is prevented from entering (leaking) the adjacent recesses. can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure for causing the light from the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from two members, the facing member and the intervening member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case of forming from members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

In the game machine E11, the game machine E12 is characterized in that the intervening member has a seat portion that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E11, the intervening member has a seat that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat, so that light from each light emitting means can be emitted. can be easily incident on the through-hole, and leakage to the outside of the through-hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. In addition, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent light emitting means from entering the through hole, so that the appearance of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be made clear.

In the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through holes are formed in a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. are arranged concentrically.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effects of the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole has a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are arranged concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

A game machine E14 in the game machine E13, characterized in that the through hole has an inner diameter that expands from the substrate side toward the facing member.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through-hole is expanded from the substrate side toward the facing member, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting means passes through the through-hole. The light can be efficiently incident on the concave portion through the hole. Moreover, since the area abutting on the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light from each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A gaming machine E15 in any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, wherein the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the intervening member facing the substrate.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the intervening member facing the substrate, so that the portion of the protrusion faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

A game machine E16 in the gaming machine E15, wherein the intervening member has a groove-like groove recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extending along the base of the seat.

According to the game machine E16, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15, the facing member has a groove-shaped groove recessed in the surface facing the board and extending along the base of the seat. It is possible to enhance the heat dissipation effect while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat, the recessed area of the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured, while the light emitting means is illuminated. It is possible to increase the heat dissipation effect by enlarging the space for the part where the heat generated by the operation particularly concentrates.

A gaming machine E17 in the gaming machine E15 or E16, characterized in that the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other.

According to the game machine E17, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15 or E16, the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other, so that the rigidity of the intervening member can be increased.

In this case, the outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions may be circular, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions may be connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seat portions are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape, so that the rigidity of the interposing member can be increased by utilizing the uneven outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. can rise.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Sorting Device 4700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; An opening formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means and having a size through which the ball can pass, and a ball flowing out from the opening into the game area are formed so as to pass through the opening. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege in accordance with the passage of the game machine F1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting the passage of the ball through the passage member is arranged downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the passage member only has the function of guiding the ball toward its downstream side (sensor device). There was a problem that it was difficult to

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, the first privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means and has a size through which the ball can pass, and the ball flowing out from the opening into the game area is formed so as to be able to pass therethrough. Since the second privilege imparting means is provided for imparting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes through, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the ball that has flowed out can be formed. passes through the second privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege can be granted by the second privilege granting means. As a result, the ball guided by the passage member not only passes through the first privilege imparting means, but also flows out from the opening into the game area, and furthermore, the outflowing ball passes through the second privilege imparting means. Form can be formed, and interest can be imparted to the game.

It should be noted that the second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, or, depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, Some balls may be received and some balls may not be received.

Also, the privilege granted by the first privilege imparting means and the privilege imparted by the second privilege imparting means may be the same privilege or may be different privileges.

In the game machine F1, the passage member has a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the balls at the bent portion tends to be stagnated. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F2, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the bent portion, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

The game machine F2 is provided with a game board on which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the game board. Characterized game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, since at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board, the bent portion of the passage member When ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed through the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging. In addition, when the game ball flows out to the game area from the opening of the passage member, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows out, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the ball entrance of the second privilege imparting means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, since at least the ball entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the game board, game balls flow out to the game area from the opening of the passage member. When playing the game, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the outflowing ball enters the ball entrance of the second privilege providing means, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a connecting passage is provided for connecting the second privilege imparting means to the passage member and guiding a ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member, the connecting passage being , the gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege imparting means is connected to the passage member, and the connection passage for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member is provided. Since the connecting passage is connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means, the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball is the second player. When the ball passes through the second privilege imparting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connecting passage and passed through the first privilege imparting means. Therefore, in addition to awarding the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, a distribution means is provided for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other, the passage members are arranged in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the swing member. A game machine F6 is connected to one of dividing means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, it is equipped with a distribution means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other. One of the passage members is connected to one of the sorting means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means, so that balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, it is possible to prevent clogging of the passage member with the balls.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6 is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Characterized game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 shaft support (second shaft)
417 protrusion (first axis)
430 displacement member (arm member)
431 drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441 drive motor (driving means)
443 transmission gear (crank member)
443a Protrusion (pin portion)
450 decorative member (displacement member)
452 front base (body member)
452h contact surface (contact member)
491c swelling portion (opposing member)
492 roller member (rotating member)
492b shaft (shaft)
500 rotation unit (rotating display device)
510 top base (part of body member)
512, 522 Blow hole (through hole)
520 lower base (part of body member)
531 base member (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 groove portion 550 front cover (transmission portion, cover member)
560 reflector (opposing member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame body (center frame)
621 cover member (front member)
621a first portion 621b second portion 630 sensor (sensor device)
640a second winning device (winning device)
740 passage member (bending member)
742 Guide part (inclined surface)
743 lower protrusion (flexion)
744 Opening KR1 First throw path (vertical passage)
KR2 second throw path (extended path)
KR3 3rd throwing path (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing path (part of inclined passage)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and that light (for example, a game A gaming machine is known that includes a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by a person's hand (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-208139 A

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of securing a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player. With the goal.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and emitting light. a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by the object of the light, the sensor device being arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, A front member having at least a front surface formed as a convex curved surface and made of a light transmissive material is provided.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (a) is a side view of the regulating unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulating unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulating unit taken along line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20(b). 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in section XXII of FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b); (c) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23(c). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member; It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the rotating unit, (b) is a front view of the rotating unit as seen in direction XXIXb in FIG. 29(a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc in FIG. 29(a) Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit on line; (a) is a top view of an intermediate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). (a) is a front view of the front cover, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). (a) is a top view of a reflector, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). (a) is a top view of the rotation unit, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). 33(a) and 33(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit in section XXXIV of FIG. 33(b). (a) and (b) are front views of a rotation unit. (a) and (b) are top views of the rotating unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame; FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 39(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVa-XLVa of FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in the second embodiment. (a) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49(b). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device according to a third embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a sorting device. (a) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVc-LVc. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. reference). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only is the winning probability of the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 640 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric role product is opened once. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for displaying patterns in a variable manner, and the passage of the ball through the first through gates 66, 67 as a trigger to variably display the second pattern. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided.

A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 600 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time. A variable display is performed by alternately turning on the lights. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gates 66, 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the 640 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gates 66 , 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured to allow some of the balls that flow down the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66, 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gates 66, 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B described above, and the second symbol suspension lamp (Fig. not shown). Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the first through gates 66, 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). Also good. Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, the ball is shot so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and by winning the prize in the first prize winning port 64, there are many chances of winning the big prize lottery, and aiming for the big prize, It is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66, 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since the state is such that it is easy to win a prize, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning port 640 so as to pass through the right side of the variable display device unit 80, passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, and enters the first It is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). can change the way Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions, and FIG. Each member 430 is shown displaced to its extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, a vertically displaceable unit 400 is provided above and a light-emitting decoration is provided below. A unit 800 is arranged respectively.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 which is arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a displacement member 430 and a decorative member which are arranged on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the back case 300, and a projection projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third pattern display device 81). position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500. By rotating the rotating unit 500 and causing the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotating unit 500 to emit light, the pattern is formed by an afterimage of light. and patterns can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 arranged on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 821 arranged inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

Next, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47. FIG. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14 , the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shaped shape when viewed from the front, a rear base 420 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 410 , and a front side of the front base 410 . , a displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and one end of the displacement member 430 connected to the displacement member 430 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9) as the displacement member 430 is displaced. direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. side wall members 470 arranged at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450; and rotation regulation arranged on the front side of the front base 410. and a member 480 .

In the vertical displacement unit 400, all the members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a pair symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair. Further, in the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair, only the member arranged on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 9) will be explained, and the member arranged on the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 9) , are assigned the same reference numerals as those on the left side in front view, and description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 410 is formed of a plate-like body that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the front. It is formed mainly with two pieces 410Y.

The first piece 410X is arranged such that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). In addition, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 standing on the front side of the left-right outer end (left end), an upper recessed groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross-section at the top, and a cross-section at the bottom. A lower recessed groove 414 formed in an arc shape is mainly provided.

The standing portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 described later to restrict the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from the top to the bottom of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

The upper recessed groove 413 and the lower recessed groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1, which will be described later, is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. In addition, the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 are formed so that the axes of the semi-circular cross-sections are located on the same straight line, and the upper end of the upper groove 413 extends from the lower groove 414 . is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 .

The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the back side, and a columnar support portion 416 projecting to the back side. Formed by the Lord.

The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted through the rear side of the front base 410 , and is a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441 . The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411 . As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be inserted through the opening 411 and arranged. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while inserting the drive motor 441 into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposing parts, this can be done easily, and the number of man-hours at the time of part replacement can be reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 can be reliably fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443, the reliability can be improved when parts are replaced.

The engaging portion 415 is a projection for locking one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and projects from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and the projecting tip thereof bends toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. It is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 about its axis with the portion protruding toward the back side, and restrict the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side with the bent portion at the tip.

The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back side of the front base 410 .

The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400. The transmission gear 442 is arranged on the front base 410 and arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 as described above. , 443 .

As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441 , and is arranged to mesh with the transmission gear 443 .

The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the projection 417 of the front base 410 fitted in its shaft hole. It is arranged in a state of meshing with the gear 442 . Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442 .

Further, the transmission gear 443 has a protrusion 443a protruding from the side surface on the back side. The projection 443 a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443 . Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the drive motor 441 to rotate the transmission gear 443 as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc about the axis of the transmission gear 443 .

The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and has a standing portion 421 standing on the front side on the outer edge.

The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is greater than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. It is set to have a large dimension, and is arranged in a state where the front end surface is in contact with the back side of the front base 410 . As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacing member 430 described later can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape in which the outer edge portion protrudes to the rear side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a circular through hole 433 penetrating in the front-rear direction in its bent portion, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 penetrating in the front-rear direction on one side of the long side, and a sliding hole 432 on the short side. It mainly includes a drive-side slide hole 431 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the other side, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

The through hole 433 is a hole into which the pivot portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot portion 416 . Therefore, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined after the through hole 433 is inserted into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410 , so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410 . can be placed in

The drive-side sliding hole 431 is an elongated hole through which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side slide hole 431 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the short side of the displacement member 430 , and as described above, the transmission gear 443 transmits the driving force of the drive motor 441 . When the transmission gear 443 is rotated by , the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side slide hole 431 as it is displaced, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433 . In other words, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be caused to move around the through hole 433. As shown in FIG.

The decoration-side slide hole 432 is an elongated hole that is provided in the decoration member 450 described later and through which the columnar support portion 452a is inserted. formed larger than The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the long side of the displacement member 430 . As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated around the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 forms an arcuate displacement trajectory around the through-hole 433. FIG.

The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion that protrudes from the rear side of the displacement member 430 . Further, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on the bent inner side surface of the displacement member 430 that is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, the other end side of the torsion spring SP<b>1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the rear side of the displacement member 430 .

The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion arranged around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410), and rotates leftward in front view around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit A displacement member 430 constituting the right side in front view of 400 is applied with a biasing force (right rotation in front view) around its rotation axis. 430 are engaged with displacement-side engaging portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates to the left with respect to the front base 410 around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 when viewed from the front rotates to the right). ) is always biased in the direction of

As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member that is interposed between a pair of facing vertical displacement units 400 that are configured as a pair of left and right units, and the size in the left and right direction is symmetrical with respect to the front base. It is set to be the same as the distance dimension between the outer ends in the horizontal direction of 410 .

The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with an open lower side, and includes a front base 452 forming a central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. 452 , and a rotating unit 500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent toward the rear side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the back side, engaging portions 452b protruding from both left and right ends to the front side, smooth contact surfaces 452h formed on the front side at both left and right ends, and and an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed into a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 rotates around the through-hole 433, it is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced as the decoration-side slide hole 432 is displaced. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the supporting portion 452a.

The engaging portion 452b is a projection with which the other end of the urging spring SP2, which will be described later, is engaged.

The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that slopes downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the later-described regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be given later.

The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section and extending in the vertical direction. Further, the sliding portion 451 has a through hole 451a that opens vertically. The through hole 451a is an opening into which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decoration member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by applying a driving force from the driving motor 441 .

The rear base 453 is a plate member that covers the rear side of the front base 452 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and has substantially the same outer size in front view as the central portion of the front base 452 . As a result, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 . A drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 to output a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 . A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be given later.

The front cover 460 is arranged to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410, and is a member that covers the front of the first piece 410X. They are formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is formed into a box-like body with an open rear side, having erected walls 461 erected on the rear side from the outer edge thereof.

The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 projecting upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a groove 462a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a groove 463a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side.

The recessed grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes of the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line, and the distance from the upper end of the concave groove 462a to the lower end of the concave groove 463a is It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

Therefore, when the front cover 460 is arranged in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper recessed groove 413 and the recessed groove 462a and the lower recessed groove 414 and the recessed groove 463a. The guide rod P1 can be arranged on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to fall off.

Also, the distance between the upright wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the laterally outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 facing each other in the front-rear direction. is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the outer end portion of the sliding portion 451 in the left-right direction is arranged between them. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends of the vertically displaceable unit 400 on the central side in the left-right direction, and are formed of substantially L-shaped plate bodies bent toward the rear side when viewed from the side. A wall surface that bends outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, is attached to the wall surface.

Further, the side wall member 470 has a pattern by unevenness or color on the side surface of the central side in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400, so that the player can easily see the center frame 86 of the game board 13. 2) so that the pattern of the side wall member 470 can be visually recognized through the central opening. As a result, the vertically displaceable unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460, etc.) disposed laterally outside of the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to the player.

The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having an axis extending in the front-rear direction is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rotation restricting member 480 . Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns the later-described rotation unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be defined by the contact between the roller 481 and the top base 510 .

The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. As shown in FIG. As a result, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410 . Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the central portion. As a result, the length of the biasing spring SP2 can be secured, and an excessive increase in the biasing force can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG.

15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, in which FIG. 15 (a) shows the state arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16 (a) shows the state between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17(a) corresponds to the state arranged in the lowered position, respectively.

15(b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15(a), FIG. 16(b) in FIG. 16(a), and FIG. 17(b) in FIG. 17(a). . 15(b), 16(b), and 17(b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed in the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the “second position”), the displacement member 430 is positioned at one end. The side (the long side where the decorative side slide hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decorative member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decorative member 450 is positioned inside the decorative slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end of the through hole 433 from the axis thereof.

Also, in this state, the rotational direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving-side slide hole 431 is formed) is substantially the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. match. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through hole 433, and the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can suppress the displacement member 430 from rotating.

From the state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are pushed downward by sliding through the drive-side slide holes 431 .

As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433, and as shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward. From this state, when each transmission gear 443 is further rotated by the rotational driving of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, and the state shown in FIGS. As shown, the decorative member 450 is placed in the lowered position (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as the "first position").

As shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are positioned on one side (driving side slide hole 431 is formed). The short side of the display device 450 is swung downward, so that the decorative member 450 is positioned at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the lowered position), the decoration-side slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the end portion radially outward from the edge. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 acts on the supporting portion 452a to displace the force in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the lateral direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the central portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacing operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later.

Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, the rattling causes the displacement member 430 to displace. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, lptp that causes the decorative member 450 to rattle can be suppressed.

Further, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of the decorative member 450 . As a result, displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be given later.

Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 490; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape with an open back side, roller members 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. and an outer edge member 493 disposed on the open (opening side) outer edge.

The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left and right direction, and an inner side surface facing the opening protruding toward the back side. and a bulging portion 491c.

The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. By doing so, the regulation unit 490 can be arranged on the side wall member 470 .

The notch portions 491b are formed by notching two notch portions 491b on both sides in the left-right direction of the case member 491 so as to be aligned in the up-down direction in a semicircular shape. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and its inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492 .

The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20(c)) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491 . Moreover, the bulging portion 491 c has a predetermined gap between it and the roller 492 a of the roller member 492 .

The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a made of an elastic member and formed in an annular shape when viewed in a cross-sectional view from the axis, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and supported by the shaft portion 492b. A pair of collars 492c arranged on the outer side of the collars 492c and a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted on the shaft portion 492b outside the collars 492c.

The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted through the inner circumference of the roller 492a. is set larger than the width dimension of In addition, recessed portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 492b in the axial direction. The recessed portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an axial outer diameter smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1, which will be described later.

The collar 492c has an annular shape when viewed from the front and a substantially stepped cross-section, and is composed of a small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and a large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than that of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1. The inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and the large-diameter tubular portion 492c2) is smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, so that the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is formed larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. be done.

The large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a member for restricting lateral displacement when the roller member 492 is arranged in the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. In addition, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both ends of the roller 492a in the axial direction is greater than the distance dimension between the opposed left and right side surfaces on the inner side of the opening of the case member 491. is also formed small.

The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted into the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b around the recess 492b1 with its opening widened. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is fitted in the recessed portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to the collar 492c from the other end on one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). ), the shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion is rotated with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 directed to one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b is inserted. After that, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the recessed portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

As a result, the lateral displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 491 . The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the shape of the inner circumference when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the shape of the inner circumference of the opening of the case member 491 when viewed from the rear. Also, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 493a. The recessed portion 493 a 1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 491 b of the case member 491 . Therefore, the roller member 492 can be arranged in the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491 facing each other.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c, which are arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492, are arranged vertically in the cutout portion 491b of the case member 491 in such a manner as to pivotally support them. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the standing portion 493a facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491 and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491 .

Next, the operation of regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in section XXII of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). . In addition, in FIG. 22(a), the outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by dashed lines.

23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24(a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a). 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b), and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400; FIG. 23(a) to 23(c) illustrate transition states of the vertical displacement unit 400, and outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is positioned at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned downward. In this case, both ends of the decorative member 450 are positioned on the rear side of the regulation unit 490 as described above.

In this case, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 (described later) is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means includes an engaging member arranged on either the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be able to engage with the engaging member and the decorative member 450 or the front base. 410 and an engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and utilizing the displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. When the decorative member 450 is positioned at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only is it necessary to retreat, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displacement of the decorative member 450 from the first position toward the second position), the biasing force of the biasing means is resisted. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490, thereby regulating the relative displacement of the front base 410. Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel, so that the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. When displacing, the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

Further, since the roller 492a is made of an elastic material that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 contacts the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer circumference of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 .

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and isolating the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side and loosening of fastening portions can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (e.g., when it is rotated at relatively high speeds to act as a versalytor), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are emitted from the decorative member 450. Since it is input to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other, the roller 492a is elastically deformed, so that the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed. Therefore, there is no need to increase the precision when molding the parts, and the manufacturing cost of the parts can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of products can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being spoiled. Further, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is perpendicular to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, so that the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a come into contact with each other. When displacing in contact, it is possible to suppress the sound of the members rubbing against each other. That is, if the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist in stopping the displacement member or to suppress rattling, the members rub against each other when the displacement member is displaced while being in contact with the projection. A sound is produced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a.

In addition, since the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410 can regulate the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 relatively heavy is arranged in the decorative member 450. Since the decorative member 450 is not necessary, the driving force required for displacing the decorative member 450 can be reduced by reducing the weight. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be made lighter, rattling can be easily suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the manner of contact between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. placed without contact.

23(a) and 24(a), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward, and as shown in FIGS. When the member 491 is displaced to substantially the same vertical position as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 come into contact. It is considered to be in a state of As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front, rear, left, and right directions.

That is, the upper roller 492a is pushed out by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and contacts the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(b)). Therefore, the decorative member 450 is restrained from rattling in the front-rear direction. Further, the roller 492a is rotatable in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves left and right. be able to.

On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is vertically displaced at the first position. can be made

Further, as described above, the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, so that the inclined surface 452g can be used when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position. can guide the roller 492a to the front side of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 to the first position can be suppressed.

23(b) and 24(b), when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

Here, if the rattling of the decorative member 450 that is vertically displaced is suppressed by a rotating body (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating body (roller 492a) It is difficult to restrict the movement of the decorative member 450 along the direction of displacement and to prevent the decorative member 450 from being displaced due to rattling in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side in which the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) is aligned with the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. , the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 490 allows only vertical displacement of the decorative member 450 to the first position, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are displaced. By forming the dead point, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Further, the roller 492 a arranged below the rollers 492 a arranged in the vertical direction is in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491 c of the case member 491 .

That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) toward the front side (right side in FIG. 24(c)). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. This increases the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b, making it difficult to rotate the roller 492a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved forward and backward (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(c)). to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter A structure that allows displacement in the direction is required.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, and its elastic deformation is used to move the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a need not be formed to be radially displaceable, the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As shown in FIG. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 does not move against the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. When the roller 492a is caught between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to looseness, the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 are separated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a. The roller 492a can be easily held by the bulging portion 491c more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is minimized. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper end to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased, so when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit is provided in the central portion of the decorative member 450, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, each part receives the weight of the decorative member 450 and the kinetic energy when displaced. Since it works, the parts are easily damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopping operation can be assisted when displacing to the first position, it is possible to assist the stopping operation in the direction in which damage is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the breakage of the parts and improve the reliability of the product.

Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged vertically along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are contacted at two points with a predetermined gap therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from tilting, and to prevent the rotation unit 500 from rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 . As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, the front base of the decorative member 450 associated with the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position and when displacing the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling with respect to 410 .

Specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotating unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotating unit 500 (the motion in which the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500 . Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is contact surface) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. At the same time, the abutment of the abutment surface 452h of the front base 452 against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a effectively suppresses the looseness of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotary unit 500. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 arranged on the decorative member 450 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 arranged between the front base 452 and the rear base 453, and a driving motor attached to the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c recessed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c has an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion thereof in the front-rear direction, and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. be.

The rear base 453 is formed of a plate-like body that is oblong in the front view and has a horizontally long rectangular shape smaller than the front view of the front base 452. The rear base 453 has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape that extends in the front-rear direction on the right side in the front view. It is mainly formed with an open insertion hole 453a and cylindrical support portions 453c and 453d projecting toward the front side.

The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 (to be described later) is inserted. is opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape that is larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

The shaft support portions 453 c and 453 d are shaft portions that are inserted into the shaft portions of the gears 455 and 456 to be described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456 .

The drive motor 457 is a motor with a built-in encoder for position detection, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 as described above. It is fastened and fixed.

The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and fixedly attached to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453 a of the rear base 453 . In addition, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed to have a smaller thickness. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshing with the gear 454 .

The gear 455 is meshed with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later. possible. In addition, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the driving motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455 to rotate the rear base 571 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 , and meshes with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 arranged in front of the front base 452 .

A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 . The gear 456 is a member having a projection on its side surface (end surface in the axial direction) for detecting the initial position (reference position). It is arranged on the base 453 . A part of the gear 456 is inserted through the second opening 452 e and is meshed with the rear base 571 . Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force to rotate the gears 454, 455 and the rotating unit 500 (back base 571), the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. . As a result, the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be detected.

In this case, the number of gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. The gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotating unit 500 . This makes it possible to easily perform initial position detection (reference position).

The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating unit 500, and is configured such that a shaft portion 458a projecting from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed to have a substantially D-shaped cross section, and has a passage opened therein through which an electrical wiring is inserted.

When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by passing through the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a and the electric wiring is inserted. and protrude from the front of the front base 452 .

Next, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 29(a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as seen in direction XXIXb of FIG. 29(a), and FIG. 29(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29(a). It should be noted that the description of the rotation unit 500 is based on the initial position (reference position).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper base 510. , an intermediate member 540 arranged below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the rear side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear base 571 arranged on the rear side and a front base 572 arranged on the front side. , a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a which bulges in a circular ring shape when viewed from the rear to the rear side from the inner peripheral edge portion. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. Gear 571a1 meshes with gear 455 as described above. Accordingly, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the rear base 571 (the gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 572a erected from an outer peripheral edge portion and an inner standing portion 572b erected from an inner peripheral portion in a U shape when viewed from the front. And prepare.

The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and holding the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 therebetween. It is set to have substantially the same standing height as the axial width dimension of the BR, and is set to have substantially the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

The side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the side of the erected distal end is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear surface side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. , and is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the inner shape thereof is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front base 452 , the inner standing portion 572 b can be fitted onto the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 are engaged with each other, so that the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, twisting of the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be suppressed.

The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572 a of the front base 572 . As a result, the bearing BR can be fixed to the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 and disposed. In this case, the inner diameter of the rear base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off from the rotation transmission unit 570 .

The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotation unit 500 to the front base 452 . The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572 b of the front base 572 . As a result, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that its outer edge portion is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR, and the inner edge portion of the fastening member 573 is inserted through the inner rising portion 572b of the front base. .

The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 with a constant protruding dimension over the entire circumference. and its outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 .

More specifically, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to restrict the rearward movement of the fastening member 573 with respect to the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is achieved by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other. is regulated by contact with the side surface of the As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed.

Further, since the fastening member 573 to which the bearing BR is fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of rotational motion to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body arranged outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the ring-shaped metal body arranged inside the bearing BR rotates. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the fastening member 573 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450 .

The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 29(a)) when viewed from above, and its front edge portion curves downward (toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29(a)). It is formed into a curved shape. The top base 510 has a decorative portion 511 that bulges out in a semicircular shape in a front view at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29(b)), and a blowing hole 512 that penetrates in the up-down direction (plate pressure direction). , and a pressing portion 513 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape.

The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572 . Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

The air blowing hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(c)), and is formed in an elongated hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(a)). In addition, a plurality of blow holes 512 are formed in the horizontal direction along the arc shape of the upper base 510 .

When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 and the upper surface base 510 sandwiched between them, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The projection height is set to the height up to the side surface of the upper surface of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29(c)). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed to protrude from the rear edge of the upper base 510 .

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570 . The decoration part 521 and the blow hole 522 formed in the lower base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the blow hole 512 formed in the upper base 510, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that when viewed from the front, the front base The bottom side of 572 can be invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the mechanism when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the player.

The irradiation unit 530 mainly includes a base member 531 and an LED 532 arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531 .

The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is slightly smaller than the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. Accordingly, when the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

Further, the base member 531 is formed with a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the base member 531, and detailed description thereof will be given later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458 b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531 . As a result, light can be emitted from an LED 532, which will be described later, through an IC and a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531. FIG.

The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) when viewed from the front, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicone sealed in the cavity) for irradiating light. The surface of the encapsulating resin such as the . Further, the LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. As a result, the LED 532 can irradiate light onto a reflector 560, which will be described later.

The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body having a top view shape substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510 . Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the opposed parts.

The front cover 550 is made of a transparent light-transmissive material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. Further, the front cover 550 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 side.

The reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. In addition, the reflector 560 has a recessed portion 564 formed by notching the side surface on the front side to the rear.

By inserting the above-described front cover 550 into the cutout portion of the concave cutout portion 564, the front surface of the front cover 550 is placed at substantially the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recess 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surface of the upper base 510 , the lower base 520 and the intermediate member 540 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from protruding from the rotation unit 500 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integral unit with little unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being spoiled by making it difficult to understand the outer shape of each part. .

A detailed description of intermediate member 540 will now be provided with reference to FIG. 30(a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a).

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge that stands upward (in the direction in which the upper base 510 is arranged) from the outer edge when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetrating in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 projecting from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a projecting portion projecting from the edge on the front side. It mainly includes a portion 545 and a groove portion 546 recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 .

The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side of the first outer edge portion 541 (lower side in FIG. 30(a)) when viewed from above is approximately the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from the top side. set to be the same. Also, the standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531 . Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 to be invisible from the front side.

The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the back side. The shape of the rear surface side (upper side in FIG. 30A) of the second outer edge portion 542 when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape of the rear surface side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Also, the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is arranged in contact with the standing tip surface of the second outer edge portion 542 . Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the rear side.

The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for separately dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, the light of adjacent LED532 can suppress irradiating another range. Also, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are arranged coaxially. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 to be described later through the irradiation hole 543 .

Also, the irradiation hole 543 is formed such that the inner diameter increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 .

The irradiation regulating portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. As a result, the gap between the opposing LEDs 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light from the LEDs 532 can easily enter the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543 . As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the erecting dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 , and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the protruding tip surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are aligned. The LED 532 abuts thereon. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent LEDs from entering the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation regulation portion 544 that abuts on the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the adjacent irradiation regulating portion 544 are connected to each other at their outer peripheral surfaces, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the radiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent radiation restricting portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are connected to each other. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly convex circular arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, leftward, and rightward, and is formed at a position where it is inserted through the through hole 531a of the base member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. The protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameters are combined vertically, and includes a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side which is smaller in diameter than the large diameter portion 545a. formed from

The large-diameter portion 545 a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 . The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531 a , and the projecting dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 .

As a result, when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the interval between the intermediate member 540 on the back side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542 . In addition, since the projection distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is aligned with the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. can be arranged parallel to each other.

The small-diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. The outer diameter is set to be the same or slightly smaller. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, by fitting the through hole 531a of the base member 531 to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, the irradiation unit 530 can be moved to the intermediate member 540 in the front, rear, left, and right directions. can define the movement of

The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and is recessed to have a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased due to the groove portion 546 being recessed, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 . That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is ensured. The operation of the LEDs 532 can increase the space for the portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, thereby enhancing the heat dissipation effect.

The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recess depth of the groove portion 546 is set to be less than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. set small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the front cover 550 will be described in detail. 31(a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). In addition, in FIG.31(b), the spreading|diffusion part 551 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion part 551 on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31(b)) of the lower side (left side in FIG. 31(b)). formed with.

The diffusing portion 551 is a portion whose surface is roughened, and the roughened surface of the diffusing portion 551 diffuses and diffuses the light irradiated onto the diffusing portion 551 . Note that surface roughening is a processing mode in which unevenness is formed on the surface.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the reflector 560 will be described in detail. 32(a) is a top view of the reflector 560, and FIG. 32(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector 560 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). In addition, in FIG.32(b), the reflection part 563 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 32(a)) and the partition wall 561. It mainly includes a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an erecting wall 562 erected along the edge on the back side.

The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with an open front side (lower side in FIG. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent erected walls 562 are combined (commonly used) with wall portions extending in the front direction to form one wall portion. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are arranged side by side can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 to be formed can be maximized.

The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of the region surrounded by the edge portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like in a top view. Further, the reflecting portion 563 is connected to a horizontal portion 563a formed of side surfaces parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, and connected to the horizontal portion 563a so that the plate thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases. and a slanted surface 563b that is slanted in the direction.

The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface parallel to the top surface and the bottom surface of the reflector 560, other than the edge portion on the front side. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and the surface is not roughened. Accordingly, the reflecting portion 563 can be formed by holding the front edge portion of the reflecting plate 560 . As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion on the reflecting plate 560 when roughening the surface, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. formed on the surface.

The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set at a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532 . As a result, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the rear side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

As described above, the erected wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflector 560, and its erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is arranged above the reflector 560). That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of heat inside the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, the heat is accumulated by the rotating unit 500, and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 is heated. Damage can be suppressed.

The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circular portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted onto the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572 from the outside. After the front base 572, the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 are integrated, the rear base 571 is arranged on the rear side, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

In the front part of the rotation unit 500 (the part excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), the lower base 520 is arranged below the reflector 560, and the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened. After the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface of the reflector 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched therebetween. The irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through hole 531 a fitted onto the small diameter portion 545 b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540 . In this state, the top base 510 is arranged from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, thereby assembling the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) as a unit.

Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened together to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33(a) is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 33(a). (a) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV section of FIG. 33(b).

Note that FIG. 33A shows a state in which the top base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34(a) and 34(b), the light emitted from the LED 532 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 33( a ) and 33 ( b ), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 , a reflecting section 563 partitioned as one area by being surrounded by a partition wall 561 is arranged. . As described above, each LED 532 is arranged above each irradiation hole 543, so that the light emitted from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state divided by each reflecting portion 563, so that the division of light from each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

In addition, since the structure for causing the light from the LEDs 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and is side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, even when the base member 531 is oriented so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (blinking) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

In addition, the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 allows the light emitted from the LED 532 to be efficiently emitted toward the player. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Some of the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560 is reflected again by the opposing surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560) to irradiate the front cover 550. FIG.

In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white, which has a lower light absorptivity than black. On the other hand, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, as described above, so that the light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 can be easily reflected again.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and can be emitted to the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being evenly dispersed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being viewed in a state where it is concentrated in a part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a and side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can pass through the front cover 550 and be emitted to the front side.

Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed on the front side end portion of the reflector 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. , the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the inner surface of the reflector 560 is roughened at the end on the front side of the rotating unit 500, the light is diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the side of the hitting player) ), the front end portion of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least the reflecting portion 563 has a flatter and smoother surface than the rough surface processed. can be suppressed, and the amount of light directed toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

In addition, the partition wall 561 is formed on the front side (the recessed portion 564 is formed at the end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (the portion where the rough surface processing of the reflecting portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the shape tapers toward the end of the rotary unit 500, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the non-roughened portion of the horizontal portion 563a increases toward the end of the front side of the rotary unit 500. Enlarged (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Furthermore, since the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to curve toward the rear toward the end with the central portion (rotational axis) in the left-right direction as the center, the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. The end of the side where the cutout 564 is formed) is closer to the front side (the side where the cutout 564 is formed) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the distance from the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 increases in the radial direction. side) is increased in length dimension. Thereby, the visible lightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the LEDs 532 closer to the axis of rotation appears to have higher brightness (brighter) than the light of the LEDs 532 farther (outward in the radial direction) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the farther the front end of the reflecting plate 560 is from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction, the more the front side (concave cutout) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 is. Since the length of the end portion of the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is spaced radially outward from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, the stronger the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (that is, by reducing the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In addition, since the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases with increasing distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction, the number of reflecting portions 563 increases. It is possible to make each visible lightness (brightness of light) uniform.

The light emitted to the front cover 550 can be diffused in the traveling direction by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550 . That is, the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550 can bend the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Also, if the light from the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without being transmitted through a light-transmissive material member), the light from the LED 532 has high directivity in the forward direction, so the player is dazzled. I was afraid to feel

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the surfaces that diffusely reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 532 are formed at two locations, the reflector 560 and the front cover 550, so that the directivity of the light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling when visually recognizing the emitted light.

Here, there is known a device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position, thereby performing display using an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the attitude of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side)). (orientation parallel to the plane of rotation), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered when the rotation of the rotating display device (rotating unit 500) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is positioned so that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the outer shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (viewed in the rotation axis direction). As a result, the visibility of the rear side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved when the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is stopped.

Next, rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

35(a) and 35(b) are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 36(a) and 36(b) are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

35(a) to 36(b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and is given the symbol of airflow K. As shown in FIG. Also, air blow holes 512 and 522 of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are illustrated by dashed lines.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, only the case where the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the left when viewed from the front will be described. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457, the rotation causes outside air to enter through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotating unit 500, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air blowing holes 512 and 522 pass through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. It is possible to make it easier for outside air to enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 .

More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated leftward in front view, in the initial position, the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the right side in front view and the air blow hole in the lower base 520 formed on the left side in front view are formed. 522 is displaced in the direction of taking in (passing through) the air into the blowing holes 512 and 522 . As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

It should be noted that the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 and the air blow hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis. External air can be easily drawn into the rotating unit 500 by the air blowing holes 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air blowing holes 522 of the lower base 520 formed on the right side of the unit 500 when viewed from the front. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the right, the same effects as in the case described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the left in the front view) are obtained.

Here, a base (base member 531) on which an LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If it is not possible to sufficiently cool the heat generated during operation of ICs and capacitors, the solder of the LEDs soldered to the board and the ICs and capacitors that control them may melt, resulting in poor contact.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, since the air blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

The air taken into the rotating unit 500 through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflector 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35(a)) flows to the outside of the rotating unit 500 through the opening (the gap between the opposing surfaces) on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. It is ventilated and released into the atmosphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 35(a)) is caused by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction from the rotation axis. The air is blown to the outside, is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and is released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35(a)).

That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with an open rear side by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outside air taken in through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 is efficiently discharged from the rear side. can be exhausted effectively, thus cooling the heat generated when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are elongated along the diametrical direction in the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is used to push the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation). It can be flowed and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, external air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back side along with the air flow.

That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the blow holes 512 and 522 in the side walls is low (or it cannot be taken in). Take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity, flow the taken in outside air to the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, and exhaust the air from the back side on the outside in the radial direction) can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the air inside the rotating unit 500 is pushed out in the radial direction due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500, the internal pressure on the central side of the rotating unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in through the gaps on the rear side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of the motor 500 and the top base 510 and the bottom base 520 . As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)) curved portion) has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). , the angle of the portion where the air flowed to the longitudinal end portion (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force changes direction toward the rear side becomes a substantially right angle, so a vortex is easily formed at this portion. . Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29(a)) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). curved portion) is formed in a shape curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction. At the same time, the angle of the portion where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. It is possible to suppress the formation of a vortex and make the air flow smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the back side (vertical dimension in FIG. 35(a)) is greater than the distance dimension on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 at the longitudinal end side. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation. By exhausting air from the back side on the radially outward side, when outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, it is possible to take in the air efficiently.

In addition, since the open portion on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decoration portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decoration portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis, the upper surface base 510 In addition, it is possible to suppress disturbance of outside air (formation of flow in the rotational direction) in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 along with the rotation of the lower surface base 520 . As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 .

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape that narrows from the back side toward the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be positioned between the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and rotation transmission unit 570 . Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion of the rotation unit 500 in the left-right direction can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, it can be taken in efficiently. .

Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame body 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame body 610, and a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 .

The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from the lower portion of the inner peripheral edge when viewed from the front, a wall portion 612 protruding radially outward from the side surface of the outer periphery, and a rear side. A fastening hole 613 recessed in a circular shape toward the front side in the edge of the sensor 630 and an opening 614 opening in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 arranged on the back side. be.

In addition, the frame 610 is arranged in the central part of the game board 13 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is a member that can be visually recognized by the player through the glass 8. A pattern or picture is drawn on the front side.

The stage 611 is formed by bending from the lower inner edge of the frame 610 toward the back side, and the upper surface thereof has a first concave portion 611a at the end on the front side and a second concave portion 611a at the end on the back side. The provided portions 611b are respectively recessed.

The stage 611 causes the ball to roll on its upper surface, and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 by utilizing the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which the ball can easily enter the prize winning opening 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of flow-down paths for the balls flowing down the game area, so that the player can be entertained.

The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60). deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for throwing a ball into an opening formed in the rear portion of the center of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and the depth of the recessed portion 611b is formed deeper toward the rear side.

The wall portion 612 is a portion that positions the center frame 600 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is arranged on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts against the front side surface of the base plate 60 . A center frame 600 can be positioned.

The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes recessed in the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from a sensor 630, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing an irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

The center cover 620 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a substantially circular shape in a front view. and a mounting portion 623 protruding outward from the standing tip surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge portion of the cover member 621. be.

The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the rear side (the curved surface is convex on the front side) as it goes outward from the upper center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as "first portion 621a") of the center portion in the left-right direction is positioned forward of left and right ends and lower edge peripheral edges (hereinafter referred to as "second portion").

Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body with a constant thickness, it is possible to prevent it from acting as a convex lens and ensure the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side.

In addition, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third pattern display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for rendering by displacing the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above.

The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion that enables the center cover 620 to be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved toward the rear side as described above, the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the center cover are correspondingly curved. When the distance between the front surface of the frame 620 and the front surface becomes large, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 .

In other words, the vertical dimension of the side wall portion 622 toward the front is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is arranged on the frame 610 . As a result, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are assembled together, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 can be prevented from projecting too far toward the front side of the frame 610 .

The attachment portion 623 is a projection for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame 610, and is formed with a plurality of through holes 623a penetrating in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the rear surface of the frame 610 at the position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, frame 610 and center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the actions of the player, and is composed of a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by an object. and an illumination surface 631 having

The sensor 630 is arranged at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is vertically divided into three equal parts, and is arranged on the right side of the frame 610 . Further, the sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 tilted toward the central front side of the center frame 600 . As a result, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion of the front side of the game board 13 through the glass 8 to the player side.

Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

39(a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view of center frame 600 along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 39(a) and 40(b), the irradiation regions of the light from the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are illustrated as irradiation regions R1 and R2. Also, in FIG. 39(b), the sensor 630 is illustrated by a dashed line. Furthermore, in FIGS. 40(b) and 40(b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be coated is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is arranged forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As shown in FIGS. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via (transmits) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 arranged on the front side. As a result, the sensor 630 can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player's side (front side).

The light irradiated from the sensor 630 is irradiated directly onto the glass 8 from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and emitted from the front side of the glass 8, which is the irradiation region R1, and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The light is reflected and emitted to the area of the irradiation area R2 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 .

Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is arranged in the gaming machine to detect the action of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third pattern display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. And there was a problem of spoiling the interest.

Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening 614 of the frame 610) to the back side (outside), it can be made more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiation surface 631) are placed in front. It becomes difficult to aim toward the target, and the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge of the decorative member (opening of the frame 610), the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is applied to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( player's side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame 610 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is formed as a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position near the sensor 630 is can be made more acute, while the angle of reflection (angle of reflection) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630, so that the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

Further, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (the light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected toward the cover member 621 when irradiated and reflected by the object. In this case, the reflected light travels in different directions depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object. The direction can be the direction of travel toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light reception detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the rear side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610 (FIG. 39 ( b) see). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is disposed at the rear surface of the base plate 60. It is disposed at a position on the back side of the .

As a result, the distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third pattern display device 81 in the upper part of the center frame 600 can be ensured. As a result, it is possible to secure the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced in the vertical direction, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in the limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is arranged.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 (see FIG. 2) of the vertical displacement unit 400 The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, since the second portion 621b is arranged at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 can be used as a light reflecting surface. It can be done easily. In other words, the sensor 630 can be arranged on the far side to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is positioned above the cover member 621, in the store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) is reflected. can be suppressed.

That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved toward the rear side, the light from the fluorescent lamp of the store illuminated from obliquely upward direction is likely to be reflected toward the front side. Since it is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 from deteriorating.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described.

41(a) and 41(b) are sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41(a) shows the rotation unit 500 in its initial position (reference position) (the position in which the extension direction is oriented horizontally), and FIG. 41(b) shows the rotation unit 500 at is rotated by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced so that the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600 are displayed. , a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 facing each other. This allows the rotating unit 500 to rotate without colliding with the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotating member (rotating unit 500) rotates in front of the third pattern display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a wind flow, and the ball flowing down under the influence of the wind is generated. I had a problem with it moving.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind caused by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, The lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame body 610), so that the falling area of the ball and the displacement area of the rotating unit 500 can be separated. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust and dust are blown away by the wind, the blown dust and dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (cover member 621). It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the detection accuracy due to soaring on the route of light emission and light reception.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that the ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall on the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 winds around the front side from the standing tip on the back side erected from the stage 611 or winds on the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13 . , and affects the ball rolling on the stage 611 . On the other hand, in order to eliminate the effect of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage 611, the rear wall is curved to the front side to form a shape that covers the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., forms a closed passage). ), it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is spoiled.

On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is directed to the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). can be blocked by As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, while suppressing the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

Here, if the displacement area where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down area where the ball flows down are partitioned by a partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 In the case 300, many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third pattern display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are arranged, so that heat is dissipated inside the displacement area (back side of the game board 13). ), and the circuit board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed with a predetermined gap from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined space. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from remaining on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 . As a result, colder air on the front side (than on the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third pattern display device 81 are not damaged. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 is formed in the upper part of the center frame 600, the warmed air is supplied to the front side of the game board 13 through the predetermined space. It is easy to flow into. That is, since the air warmed on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, it moves from the predetermined gap between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 to the front side. It can flow easily. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind comes out of the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. It may affect the ball being played.

On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (the area above the opening of the game board 13), It is possible to suppress that the flow of water is affected. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that was shot from the ball shooting unit 112a and flowed into the game area. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of sorting device 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45(a). 45(c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVd-XLVd in FIG.

In FIG. 43, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication holes 751, and the recovery holes 752 are illustrated with broken lines. In addition, in FIG. 45(d), the path of the ball that is dispensed from the opening 744 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 43). It mainly includes a side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 .

The front side forming portion 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 730 .

The back side forming portion 720 is mainly formed by an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 arranged on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

The prize winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described first prize winning port 64 positioned at the upper center in the left-right direction, and a first electric accessory 640a positioned below the first prize winning port 64. , a through-hole 731 located on both sides of the first electric accessory 640a in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through-hole 731 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. , is formed mainly with.

The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper projecting portion 741 of a bending member 740, which will be described later, is inserted. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the rear surface to the front surface.

Two protruding walls 731a are arranged side by side symmetrically about the center line of the through hole 731 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the protruding distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, the ball passing (rolling) inside the through hole 731 by the interposing member 750 and the distributing member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is guided from the back side to the front side. rolled towards the side.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 . The lower insertion hole 732 has a generally D-shaped opening with a curved lower surface when viewed from the front. and a second projecting portion 732b.

The first projecting portion 732a is formed such that the projecting distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45(a)) toward the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45(a)). The second protruding portion 732b is formed so that the protruding distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance dimension between the opposing first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the inclination of the second projecting portion 732b from the front side to the back side allows the ball to roll to the back side. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first projecting portion 732a.

A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732 . The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than that of a sphere. can detect the passage of The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the circular arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 . As a result, the opening direction of the through-hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the rear side, so that the sphere passing through the through-hole of the sensor SE can be prevented from remaining inside the through-hole.

The bending member 740 is a member that is arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is positioned substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. are arranged symmetrically, and the external shape thereof is formed symmetrically.

In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough for a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. As a result, the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is prevented from remaining in the game area by being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 .

The bending member 740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the rear surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposed lower protrusions 743 .

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 . As a result, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 , the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 . Therefore, when arranging the bending member 740 to the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted for positioning, so the assembling process can be simplified.

In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape whose lower side is open when viewed from the rear, when the ball is passed through the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 and rolled toward the bending member 740, the ball can be pushed. A connection portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the . Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731 . That is, when a connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball bounces on the steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the ball and suppress the clogging of the ball.

Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in a rear view and the ball is passed through the inside of the annular ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the shape of the bending member 740 is complicated due to the formation of the upper projection 741 in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, so the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in a rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second ball throwing path KR2”) for throwing a ball that is thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. ), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The projection distance of the lower projecting portion 743 toward the rear side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the prize winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the prize winning member 730 . Therefore, the distance between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 facing each other is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (referred to as "first ball throwing path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 protruding from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.

The guide part 742 is a projecting wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction, and then throws the ball to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. , and the height in the vertical direction of the lower inner edge is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the rear surface.

Two guide portions 742 are formed symmetrically about the center line in the horizontal direction of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side in a front view. As a result, the sphere is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742, so that the sphere can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The protruding tip surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the mutually facing surfaces (see FIG. 45(b)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the sphere that is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The upper projecting portion 741 is formed with sidewalls 741a that project inward from the left and right side surfaces in a rear view. A plurality of side walls 741a (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 in the normal state rolls in the horizontal direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the thrown ball. On the other hand, when two balls continuously flow inside the upper protruding portion 741, and the ball flowing behind collides with the ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, thereby It is possible to prevent the balls from being clogged inside the upper protruding portion 741 by securing a distance for escaping in the direction. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball thrown inside the upper projecting portion 741. As shown in FIG.

The openings 744 are predetermined gaps formed between the upper projecting portion 741 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other, and are formed on both left and right sides in a rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on the rear side in a side view.

The upper end of the opening 744 is set at substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is approximately midway in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. is set to the height of As a result, when the balls are successively thrown into the bending member 740 , it is possible to prevent the preceding balls from escaping into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740 . That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the left-right side surface of the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward to both the left and right sides from a center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a seesaw member 762 arranged in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper side of the seesaw member 762. and a ball feed port 763 formed in the .

The ball feed port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760 , and is formed at a position facing the first prize winning port 64 of the prize winning member 730 . As a result, when the distribution member 760 is arranged in an interposition member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feed port 763 and the interposition member 750 facing each other.

The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the ball (i.e., a space through which the ball can pass), and the first prize winning opening of the prize winning member 730 through a through hole drilled in the base plate 60. It is connected with the internal space of 64 (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball that wins the first prize winning opening 64 can be thrown into the space A, and the ball can be thrown inside the space A. - 特許庁

The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a protruding outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. and a portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inside of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposition member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is thrown in the opposite direction. That is, the ball thrown from the space A can be thrown in the horizontal direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes causes the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion to be displaced in the direction in which the seesaw member 762 is positioned. The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761 is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the protrusion 762a that is displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761, thereby restricting the displacement.

Inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throwing path KR3”) along which the balls distributed to the left and right by seesaw member 762 are rolled and thrown. It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

The inclined surface 761 is inclined toward the insertion member 750 at the end on the lower side so that the thickness of the side surface on the back side increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof can be thrown to the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged in front of the sorting member 760 .

The intervening member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. and a collection hole 752 that opens below the hole 751 .

The communication holes 751 are formed on the front side of the right and left end portions of the distribution member 760 and formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 . Therefore, the spaces at the right and left end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication holes 751 . Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as "fourth ball throwing route KR4"). ) can be formed.

The recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown to the opening of the recovery hole 752 . The recovery hole 752 is connected to a ball circulation device installed in the store, and the balls recovered to the recovery hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out from the ball shooting unit 112a again as game balls. .

The sorting device 700 configured as described above throws balls as follows. A ball entering from the first winning hole 64 is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown by a seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction. When the ball thrown through the third ball path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball path KR3, it reaches the fourth ball path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown. A ball thrown through the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740 . A ball thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower projecting portion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. A ball that is thrown through the second ball-throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize-winning member 730 and the inside of the sensor SE, and then is thrown to the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 3750 .

Here, as described above, the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right. The first electric accessory 640a is positioned between the lower protruding portions 743 of the bending member 740 of .

In this case, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743 . On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased, and ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) increases, making it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 from occurring. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction required for disposing the third ball throwing route KR3 (distribution member 760) can be reduced, and the first electric accessory 640a can be disposed. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a is impossible with the conventional product, and is possible only by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower projecting portion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

Here, in this embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for a larger size of the third pattern display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also become larger. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the play area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third ball throwing path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. was difficult.

That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third throwing path KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steeper), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased, making it difficult for the ball to clog the lower protruding portion 743. The space in the height direction required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 increases, making it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the two, and it becomes necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring in the lower protruding portion 743. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of the 3-throwing path KR3 (gentle descending inclination). As a result, since the arrangement position in the height direction (vertical direction) of the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) can be raised (higher), the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) and the game area (lower inner edge of the inner rail 61), a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide the first outlets 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is This arrangement is impossible with the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower projecting portion 743 as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the ball throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 46(a) corresponds to FIG. 45(a), and FIG. 46(b) corresponds to FIG. 45(b).

As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 with almost no gap (that is, two balls in a row), the previous (preceding) ball is thrown. A portion of the ball enters the opening 744 and is fed to the rear side and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 .

Here, if a passage with a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed, and the passage is curved, two spheres can be placed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected to each other). ) When a ball is thrown, the preceding ball hits the trailing ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, making it impossible for both to roll, resulting in ball jamming. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, when a plurality of balls pass through the lower projecting portion 743 in a row, Even if the trailing ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is possible to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall, and to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect, it is possible to prevent the ball from being easily clogged at the bent portion. That is, in the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed (dropped) down the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and rolls toward the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the ball starts to move, and the trailing ball can easily catch up with the leading ball. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the intersection of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2. The ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) to make it difficult to press against the side wall, making it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

Furthermore, as described above, since the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the approximately middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730, the ball falls (flows down) along the first throwing path KR1. When the ball to be played reaches the bottom wall of the second ball-throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 to be less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, the lower projecting portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the side, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower projecting portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A sidewall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second ball throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. can be suppressed.

In this case, if the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening 744 can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. A configuration is formed in which the leading ball pushes the leading ball toward the center of the opening 744 , and the leading ball may be nested within the opening 744 . In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening 744, and ball clogging occurs.

On the other hand, since the opening 744 is made larger than the outer shape of the sphere (it is formed in a size that allows the sphere to pass through), a configuration is formed in which the trailing sphere presses the leading sphere toward the center of the opening 744 . Even if it is done, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Also, in this way, the opening 744 is formed with a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening 744 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the ball flows down the game area. A ball can flow into the flexure member 740 through the opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the lower projecting portion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower projecting portion 743, the bending member A ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (the area where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, so the flow from the opening 744 to the bending member 740 is provided. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, also from this point, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion curved downward toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed in the region where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect. As a result, when the ball flowing down (falling) down the first ball-throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second ball-throwing path KR2, the ball is moved to the downward slope of the guide part 742. can be used to move quickly. As a result, the leading ball can be easily rolled before the trailing ball catches up with it, and the trailing ball rolls the trailing ball to the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the rear side when rolling, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at the curved portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. When this happens, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

Furthermore, when dust or debris accumulates in the curved portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. to allow cleaning of the flexure through opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Next, the luminous decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 . 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the luminous decoration unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47, the luminous decoration unit 800 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 810 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base body 810 on the front side of the base body 810. It mainly includes a light-emitting device 820 to be provided and a cover member 830 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 820 and made of a light-transmitting material.

On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

Next, a regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 48 and 49, the overall configuration of regulation unit 2490 will be described. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment. 49(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49(c) is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 2490;

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment, a roller member 492 is pivotally supported by a rotating member 2494 so that the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by rotating the rotating member 2494. be.

The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493. It mainly includes a rotating member 2494 that is clamped and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 .

The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and is formed to have a width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49(b)) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly formed with a protruding portion 491a that protrudes from the side surface on the front side, and cutout portions 2491b that are cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

The notch portion 2491b is cut out in a semicircular shape at approximately the center position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49(b)) of both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 49(b)). be. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494 to be described later therein, and its inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494 .

The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491 . The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491 . In addition, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 2493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 2493a. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492 . Therefore, the rotation member 2494 can be rotatably disposed in the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotation member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the concave portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491 facing each other.

The rotating member 2494 is formed of an oblong plate-like body in a side view, and its longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491 . The rotating member 2494 has a cylindrical shaft portion 2494b projecting outward in the left-right direction from the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction; and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the projecting tip portion of the portion 2494b.

The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the tip of the protruding portion. Accordingly, by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and arranging the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the rear side, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition, the rotation member 2494 can be regulated from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the regulating portion 2494c.

The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 from which the retaining ring E1 has been removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 onto the shaft portion 492b. can be disposed on the rotating member 2494 at .

The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

First, the shaft portions 492b of the roller members 492 are inserted into the shaft support holes 2494a of the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair, and the roller members 492 are supported by the rotating members 2494. As shown in FIG. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged vertically in parallel between the opposing rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

Next, after disposing a torsion spring (not shown) on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 and fitting it in the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the rear side, thereby rotating the spring. The member 2494 can be arranged rotatably with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, by rotationally displacing the rotating member 2494, the position of the roller member 492 arranged on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced. In addition, the roller member 492 arranged above the roller members 492 arranged vertically is biased toward the front side (left side in FIG. 49(c)) by the torsion spring arranged on the shaft portion 2494b. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50(a) to (c) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50(a) corresponds to FIG. 24(a), FIG. 50 to FIG. 24(b), and FIG. 21(c) to FIG. 18(c).

As shown in FIG. 50(a), when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is pulled by a torsion spring (not shown) provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. As shown in FIG. is rotated so that the roller member 492 arranged above the roller member 492 arranged on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. , the roller 492a of the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 and exerts a lower pressure than the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, so that the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(b) to the first position shown in FIG. 50(c), a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450 It is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor 441 that is driven.

Further, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position as shown in FIG. As a result, the roller member 492 on the lower side is pushed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the roller 492a on the upper side is displaced to the front side. As a result, the pressing force of the upper roller 492a against the decorative member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced to facilitate displacement. That is, as the decorative member 450 is displaced, the pressing force applied from the regulation unit 2490 to the decorative member 450 can be changed.

Next, a sorting device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the overall configuration of sorting device 3700 will be described. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIa-LIIIa line in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIb-LIIIb line in FIG. 52(b). .

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 , in the sorting device 3700 of the third embodiment, the opening of the second prize winning port 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700 .

The sorting device 3700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and has a front side formation portion 3710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and a rear side with respect to the base plate 60. and a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

The front side forming portion 3710 mainly includes a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 3730 .

The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the rear side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member positioned below the distribution member 760. 3750 and a second ball feeding path 3770 disposed on the back side of the ball 3750.

The prize winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described first prize winning port 64 at the upper center in the left-right direction. A through hole 731 is formed through both sides of the accessory 640a in the left and right direction, a second through hole 3733 is formed through the through hole 731 in the front and rear direction, and a second through hole 3733 is formed below the through hole 3733. and a lower insertion hole 732 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second prize winning opening 640, and a second protruding wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface so as to protrude upward from the back side to the front side. .

Two second protruding walls 3733a are arranged side by side symmetrically with respect to the center line of the second through hole 3733 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the protruding distance thereof is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, when a ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the later-described intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding passage, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 3730, and is provided on both the left and right sides of the second prize winning port 640. The pair of external shapes are formed symmetrically.

The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the back side, an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741. and a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below 3745 .

The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is elongated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) when viewed from the rear, and is formed on both the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. It is formed at the same height as the approximately middle position of the through hole 3733 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protruding portion 3745 is positioned below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733 .

A second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741 facing each other. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other.

The second opening 3746 has a substantially U-shape opening on the rear side in a side view, and the inner shape thereof is formed to be larger than the outer shape of a sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the sphere to pass through. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be given later.

The second ball feed path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with a constant thickness and an open front side. The second ball-throwing path 3770 is a ball-throwing path for throwing a ball that enters the second winning port 640 to the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is arranged on the back side of the interposing member 3750. , a ball-throwing passage can be formed between the inner side of the second ball-throwing passage 3770 and the interposing member 3750 .

The second ball feed path 3770 has a left end located on the back side of the second prize winning opening 640 of the prize winning member 3730 when viewed from the front, and a right end of the second ball feeding path 3770 located in the second through hole of the prize winning member 3730. 3733 is located on the back side. That is, the second ball feed path 3770 is arranged in the interposition member 3750 such that the left end in a front view is positioned higher than the right end and tilts downward toward the right end.

Further, the second ball feed path 3770 has a left end connected to the second prize winning port 640 in a front view, and a right end connected to the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 . As a result, the ball that has entered the second winning hole 640 is thrown into the second ball-throwing path 3770, and then rolls inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is thrown to the second connecting hole 3753 of the setting member 3750 .

The intervening member 3750 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and communication holes 751 located on both left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and formed through in the front-rear direction. a recovery hole 752 positioned below the communication hole 751 and penetrating in the longitudinal direction, and a second connecting hole 3753 positioned between the right communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 and penetrating in the longitudinal direction. and .

The second connecting hole 3753 is formed to have a generally rectangular shape in a front view. . As a result, the ball rolling inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 described above passes through the second connecting hole 3753 and is thrown to the second through-hole 3733 of the interposing member 750 .

The sorting device 3700 configured as described above throws balls as follows. A ball entering from the first winning hole 64 is thrown to a sorting member 760 and alternately thrown to either one of the left and right inclined surfaces 761 by a seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 . When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is sent to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side, and reaches the back side of the bending member 740. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown to the back side of bending member 740, 3740 is guided along the protruding tip end surface of guide part 742 of bending member 740, 3740 and drops downward, and also passes through lower insertion hole 732 of winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the interposing member 3750 .

A ball entering from the second winning hole 640 is thrown to the second ball-throwing path 3770, and is thrown inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball that is thrown to the right end of the second ball-throwing path 3770 passes through the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passes through the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, it falls downward while being guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 3730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and then intervenes. The ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750 .

Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, the ball entering from the second prize winning port 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the prize winning member 3730 when viewed from the front. There is no need to dispose the sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE for detecting the ball entering from the first winning hole 64 can also serve as the sensor SE for detecting the ball entering the second winning hole 640, so the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. can.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, second opening 3746 of bending member 3740 will be described. (a) and (b) of FIG. 54 are sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54(a) corresponds to FIG. 53(a), and FIG. 54(b) corresponds to FIG. 53(b).

As shown in FIG. 54 , a ball enters from the first winning hole 64 and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 , and a ball enters from the second winning hole 640 and is thrown from the bending member 3740 . If the balls that are thrown to the back side are thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and become jammed.

That is, the ball that is thrown from the second prize winning port 640 and fed from the second through hole 3733 of the prize winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as the “lower ball”) passes through the first prize winning port 64. The ball is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 3730, and collides with the ball falling from above to below the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as "upper ball"). , there is a danger that the ball will get stuck and get stuck by being caught on the front side end of the second through hole 3733 .

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper ball is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the opposing second openings 3746, thereby allowing the lower ball to move. and the ball on the upper side can be eliminated to prevent the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740 .

That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the lateral side surface where the upper sphere is positioned, and the upper spheres Since the spherical shape leans on either the left or the right, the upper sphere is sent to the inside of the second opening 3744 on either the left or right. As a result, the balance between the lower sphere and the upper sphere can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of balls in the ball feed path of the bending member 3740 .

Next, referring to FIG. 55, a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

55(a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55(a). (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 55(b). In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), the passing path through which the ball passes is schematically illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize winning opening that is located outside and below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 55(a)). 4063 is provided.

The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 . The winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, on the back side thereof, and a ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

The recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 4750 is formed by bending downward at the tip of the second ball throwing path KR2, and a path (sixth ball throwing path KR6) through which the ball passes and is thrown downward is formed. be. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

A third connecting hole 4752a projecting to both the left and right sides is formed in the sixth ball throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the lower portion of the third connecting hole 4752a.

The third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the open portion of the winning opening 4063 on the back side. As a result, the ball that has entered the prize winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connecting hole 4752a and is thrown to the sixth ball path.

A sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6 is arranged on the passage of the third connecting hole 4752a. As a result, it is possible to detect the ball that has entered the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a.

As a result, the ball ejected from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can enter the winning opening 4063 . That is, the ball guided by the bending member 740 not only passes through the sensor SE, but also flows out from the opening 744 into the game area. It is possible to form a passing form and add interest to the game.

In addition, the winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 into the game area. some balls may be placed in unacceptable positions.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the balls that are likely to be clogged can be put out from the opening into the game area, thereby making the first ball-throwing passage KR1. and the second ball throwing route KR2.

Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the ball paid out from the opening 744 enters the winning opening 4063. It is possible to easily impart interest to the player.

Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning hole 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged on the third connecting hole 4752a. Instead, it passes through the sensor SE located on the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, the ball entering from the prize winning opening 4063 can pass through the two sensors, so that the player can be entertained.

In addition, since the balls thrown to the bending member 740 are sorted to the left and right one by one by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball from clogging the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is arranged on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically about the center line of the center frame 600 in the horizontal direction. More than two sensors 630 may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be arranged on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400 . In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a convex curved surface on the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the central portion on the front side. Alternatively, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 should be reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 serves both to make the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side and to serve as the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although it has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects the light emitted from the sensor 630. You can divide the area into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40(b), and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has second regions R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56), and center sides (third pattern display devices) of the second regions R2 at both ends. 81) is provided with a first region R1.

The first region R1 is a region where the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be visually recognized by the player, and is formed of a light-transmitting material with a relatively high degree of transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side of the gaming machine 13 (toward the player). The boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 should be visible to the player positioned on the front side of the gaming machine 13. Identical positions are preferred. In addition, in this modified example, the sensors 630 are arranged at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

In this case, for example, the back side or the front side of the second region R2 may be coated with a member having a high reflectance such as silver foil. Alternatively, a silver sticker may be attached to the back side or front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may have a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the cover member 621, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be set. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Furthermore, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting through the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

In each embodiment described above, the two inclined surfaces 761 (third ball throwing path KR3) of the distribution member 760 are formed to have the same length. 761 (third throwing path KR3) may have different lengths. In this case, the time required for the sensor SE to detect each ball sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 720 can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be entertained.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be made of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a uniform thickness. However, the thickness of the cover member 621 may be varied. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

In the first embodiment, the elastic deformation of the roller 492a is used to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. It is not limited to this, and may utilize the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is displaceable, and the roller 492a is displaced to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. good.

In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. For example, it can be formed from a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the above-described third embodiment, the upper roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 before the lower roller 492a. The roller 492a that is placed on the lower side may contact the decorative member 450 later than the roller 492a that is placed on the lower side.

For example, the roller 492a arranged above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are spaced apart from each other) is positioned between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the front-rear direction (FIG. 50). It may be configured to provide a predetermined gap in (a) the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed compared to the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. Gaps may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to prevent air from staying (accumulating) inside the irradiation hole 543 . That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the surface roughening is formed in an uneven shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the surface roughening may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions). , a surface consisting only of recesses (hollows). The roughening may also extend as striations or grooves. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be circular, keyed, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, and a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is distributed to the displacement area of the rotation unit 500. It may be introduced into (rotating area). That is, the space between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620) may be filled with smoke. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while allowing smoke to pass through, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. In addition, while the rotating unit 500 or its rear side member is hidden by the smoke (while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize), only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized. Therefore, the production effect of the LED 532 (light) can be enhanced.

In the conventional product, it was difficult to keep the above-mentioned space filled with smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the rotation unit rotated. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain a smoke effect. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper base 510 and the lower base 520, and the rear surface of the structure assembled with the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is arranged. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the space described above can be filled with smoke (stayed around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in a smoke-filled atmosphere, and the effects described above can be achieved.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Cover 620 as an Example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by an object of the light. and a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the sensor device is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front side is formed as a convex curved surface, and is made of a light transmissive material A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a front member consisting of.

Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object (for example, a player's hand) that emits light and emits light 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light (eg, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is visibly exposed to the player, the player loses interest. Therefore, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device detects the existence of an object by emitting light and receiving the light reflected by the object through the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The further apart (backward) the sensor device is arranged from the decorative member, the less likely it is to be visually recognized by the player, but the narrower the range in which the object can be detected becomes, and the sensor device becomes closer to the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is arranged, the wider the detectable range of the object becomes, but the more likely it is to be visually recognized by the player. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and is provided with a front member made of a light transmissive material, light is emitted from the sensor device. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be arranged away from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), so that the sensor device is difficult for the player to visually recognize and the object can be detected. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is made more acute at a position closer to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, so that the detectable range of the object can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected in front of the front member.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. can be suppressed, and the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine A2, a displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member that is closer to the front than the second portion. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is disposed at a position where

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the front member is arranged at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second portion, so that the game can be played. The first portion can be used as a passage for the displacement member to be displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is positioned closer to the back side than the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased accordingly in a limited space.

The first part of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the game board, and the second part of the front member is positioned closer to the rear surface of the game board. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position on the back side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be suppressed more reliably, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position closer to the back than the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be illuminated accordingly. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

In the game machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at the inner edge of the opening of the game board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the game board and the back side of the front member. and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the rear side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The second portion (the front member) can block the wind generated by this. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust is blown away by the wind, the second portion (the front member) can block the blown dust and dust.・It is possible to suppress the deterioration of detection accuracy due to flying up on the light path of light reception.

In the gaming machine A5, the center frame has a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second part of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage of the center frame is provided with a rear wall so that the ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the rear side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member winds around the rear wall standing from the stage toward the front side, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. to affect the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to eliminate the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage, if the rear wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., form a closed passage). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest in the game is lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the second part of the front member is connected to the range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotary member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, while suppressing the influence of the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

In the game machine A5 or A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or center frame of the opening of the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in either the game machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged with a predetermined gap between the inner edge of the opening of the game board or the center frame. , the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through such a predetermined space. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be suppressed from remaining on the back side of the game board and the front member.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, so that the rotating member can be rotated. The wind generated in can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (area above the opening of the game board), and the flow of the ball can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that has been launched from the launcher and flowed into the game area. Compared to a moving ball, it is less affected by the wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member), the air warmed by the heat rises. A gap (predetermined gap) that is formed in the area, that is, allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate can be formed higher up. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) is made easier to flow to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, thereby preventing heat buildup on the back side of the game board and the front member. can be suppressed.

A game machine A9 in any one of the game machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least with respect to the horizontal direction.

Here, since the front member is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it almost faces the player's face (faces the face directly). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from the fluorescent lamps installed on the ceiling of the store or from other gaming machines is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzled. There is a risk that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device will be degraded (the liquid crystal display device will become difficult to see due to the reflection of light from fluorescent lamps and other game machines on the front member).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the deterioration of the visibility of the liquid crystal display device.

In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of approximately A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is set to a constant value and that the horizontal component increases toward the front located vertically upward.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion where the can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is transferred to the first part of the front member (the game board and the gap (predetermined )) to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Sorting Device 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion being formed in a part of said passage member, said passage member having an opening formed in a side wall of said bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position at which the ball flows out from the path to the game area), so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the above-described conventional game machine, the flow of the balls in the bent portion tends to be stagnated. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the bent portion, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

In the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage, and the opening extends in the vertical direction. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is formed in an area where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage. , and since the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the position where the ball that has flowed down (dropped) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage. It is easy for the ball following the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur. On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, even if the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is pushed to the side wall. It is possible to make it difficult to press and make it easy to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extension path intersect, and is formed in the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension path. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extended path Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, it is difficult to press the trailing ball against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the game machine B3, the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the back side when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended path A game machine B4 is characterized in that a side wall of the game machine B4 is formed with an inclined surface inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extension passage.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, along the extension direction of the bottom wall and the extension path that will be the rolling surface When the ball rolls, the side wall on the back side forms an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage, so the ball flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes direction. When the ball starts rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. As a result, the leading ball can be easily rolled before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball causes the trailing ball to roll on the back side (along the extending direction of the extending passage). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the back side when rolling, it is possible to make it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The slope of the inclined surface may be a straight slope, a curved slope, or a combination of these slopes. In addition, the downward inclination angle of the inclined surface need not be greater than the downward inclination angle of the extended passage over the entire inclined surface. The point is that it is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the passage.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the front side of a board.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) of the bent portion of the path member ) is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a clogged ball occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the glass plate can be opened to remove the clogged ball from the bent part on the front side of the game board. can be accessed through an opening to the Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and is positioned at a height corresponding to the radius of a ball from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A game machine B6 characterized by being formed in a range including.

According to the game machine B6, in any of the game machines B2 to B5, the opening is the side wall in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the ball from the bottom wall that serves as the rolling surface. Since it is formed in a range that includes the height position where the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A game machine B7 is arranged on the front side of a board, and the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

According to the game machine B7, in any one of the game machines B2 to B6, at least a region (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) where at least the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect among the bent portions of the passage member is used for the game. Since it is arranged on the front side of the board and the opening is formed in a size that allows the balls to pass through, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, if the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. Forms may be formed that push the preceding ball into the center of the opening, causing the preceding ball to be nested (snapped) into the opening. In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening, and ball clogging occurs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B7, even if the following ball pushes the preceding ball toward the center of the opening, the preceding ball is pushed from the opening to the outside of the passage member (the front side of the game board). game area), and it is possible to avoid that the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be prevented. It can flow into the passage member through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the bend, in addition to the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the upstream of the bend, the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the opening are also used as winning holes. can be detected. Especially in this case, since the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

In the game machine 7, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extended passage A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall of the Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

In game machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed so as to slope downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center of the game area in the width direction and the bent portion is positioned outside the game area in the width direction. A game machine B9 characterized in that a winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

According to the game machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent portion in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the balls will be low, and ball clogging will easily occur at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to clog in the bent portion. The downward slope can be gradual). As a result, the space in the height direction required for arranging the inclined passage can be reduced, and it is possible to arrange the winning device. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the prize winning device described in the game machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible in the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

In the game machine B9, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical path and the extended path intersect is located on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member that is disposed on the front side of the game board and the lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by:

Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board has also become larger, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area has become narrower. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to dispose the passage member and the member corresponding to the winning device described in the game machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the balls becomes low, and ball clogging easily occurs at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device. In addition, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Out ports must be provided on both sides.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the bent portion. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be made small (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the bent portion can be raised (raised), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide outlets on both sides of the bent portion. In other words, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9 is further combined with the arrangement described in the game machine B10 (the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). is an arrangement that is not possible with conventional products, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the body member; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a plurality of through holes penetrating through a side wall facing in the direction of rotation.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968).

In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting means is exposed, the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Thus, the luminous means are not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light-emitting means is arranged is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, a similar display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotating display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably pivotally supported by a base member. publicly known). According to this, since the light-emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, the light-emitting means is difficult to be visually recognized, and the appearance is not spoiled. In addition, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light-emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem was found in that it is difficult to cool the light-emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs and capacitors that control them are soldered to the substrate. , may cause poor contact.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the main body member has a plurality of through holes penetratingly formed in the side wall facing the rotation direction, when the main body member is rotated, the main body member passes through the plurality of through holes. outside air can be taken into the inside of the Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side open, so that outside air taken in from the through-hole of the side wall is efficiently taken in from the back side. can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

In the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is inclined toward the longitudinal end side. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, by utilizing the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and be exhausted from the rear side. Therefore, along with the air flow, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and near the rotating shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low around the rotating shaft and its vicinity, outside air is not taken in efficiently (or cannot be taken in) from the through-hole of the side wall. outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken outside air is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, forming a flow of air that is exhausted from the rear side on the outside side in the radial direction). be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the rotating shaft and the light emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof.

In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the main body member (i.e., if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), centrifugal force causes the longitudinal ends (during rotation Since the angle of the portion where the air flowed radially outward) changes direction toward the rear side is approximately a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the longitudinal end side, so that the centrifugal force causes the longitudinal end side (during rotation) The angle of the portion where the air flowing radially outward) can be gradually flowed to the back side, and the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle, the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed, and the air can flow smoothly. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the rotating shaft and the light-emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft that is larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft, which is larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. is also increased, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation is used to flow the air inside the body member to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation), and from the rear side on the radially outward side By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, it can be taken in efficiently.

The gaming machine C5 of the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the main body member is formed such that the rotation axis and the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation axis are formed in a circle concentric with the rotation axis. It is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of flow in the rotating direction) accompanying the rotation of the rotating shaft. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member that rotatably supports the body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter that decreases from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity as the body member rotates, the outside air can flow smoothly along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be achieved more reliably.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is housed in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characterized game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the board is arranged such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to that surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed in the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor, thereby enhancing the heat radiation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor operates. In addition, when the board is housed in the main body member, the front or back surface of the board faces the side wall of the main body member. ) can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices arranged on the back side thereof.

A gaming machine C8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it comprises smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, the smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device is provided, so that the flashing of the light emitting means can be highlighted. can be done. In addition, while the rotating display device is hidden by the smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be seen, so that the presentation effect of the light can be enhanced.

In a conventional rotating display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, making it difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. is formed and outside air can be circulated so that the smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above effects can be achieved.

As a smoke generator, for example, a type that heats and vaporizes water-based or oil-based oil (liquid) to generate smoke (smoke). Examples include a type that retains fine particles and a type that ejects carbon dioxide gas.

In the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a liquid crystal display device arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting on the front side a front member formed in a curved shape and made of a light-transmitting material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotating display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a front side of the liquid crystal display device a front member disposed on the side of the liquid crystal display device and formed to be convexly curved toward the front side and made of a light-transmitting material; at least the main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to make the blinking of the light-emitting means stand out in an atmosphere filled with smoke, or to make only the blinking of the light-emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with the smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the above-described lighting effect using smoke.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
a base member; a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member; In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced while being placed at the first position, a rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the body member, and the body member being placed at the first position. an abutting member facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being held so as to be able to abut on the other of the base member and the main body member, wherein the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

A base member, a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the body member, wherein the body member is A game machine is known in which a displacement member is formed to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, JP-A-2013-162990).

In this case, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress the looseness. The engaging means includes an engaging member disposed on one of the body member and the base member and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be engageable with the engaging member and attached to the other of the body member and the base member. and an engaged member disposed thereon, utilizing the displacement of the body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position) to retract the engaging member while resisting the biasing force of the biasing means. When the member is placed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the body member from the first position toward the second position), the body member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. There is a problem that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and the driving force required to displace the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the main body member contacting the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being arranged at the first position. and an abutment member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to face each other. The displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. In this case, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotary member are set substantially parallel. When the body member is displaced to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

The game machine D2 in the game machine D1 is characterized in that at least the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In some cases, the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member by elastically deforming the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided, loosening of fastening portions, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (e.g., rotated at relatively high speeds to function as a versawriter), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are transmitted from the body member to the base member. , it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be radially displaceable, and one of the base member and the main body member rotates the rotating member while the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D3, characterized by comprising a facing member arranged to face the abutting member on both sides thereof and facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut thereon.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member is arranged at the first position. In this state, the body member is arranged to face the contact member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and the opposing member faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface of the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

Examples of a configuration in which the rotating member is radially displaceable include a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is radially displaceable, and a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is configured to be radially displaceable. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft that is fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the through hole of either the body member or the base member that receives the shaft and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body with an annular cross-section having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The game machine D4 is characterized in that the displacement of the rotating member in the radial direction is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotary member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member If the rotating member is caught between the contacting member and the opposing member due to rattling of the member, the contacting member and the opposing member can be rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). This makes it easier to hold the member more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It need not be formed as a shaft and can be formed as a shaft that is fixed to one of the base member or the body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, a pair of the rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members rotate when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members are arranged so that the main body member is the first. Since they are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the direction of displacement when they are arranged at one position, the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the member with respect to the base member.

That is, since the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, but only one rotating member is abutted by the abutting member. In such a case, the rotation of the rotating member may cause the contact member to tilt, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member may cause rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined spacing, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations with a predetermined spacing. Therefore, the rotating member can be contacted without being rotated, and tilting of the contact member can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the contact member is provided on a side of a contact surface with which the rotating member contacts, which receives the rotating member when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed at an end portion thereof, the inclined surface being inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the abutment member can be set to the first position when the body member of the abutment surface with which the rotating member abuts is arranged at the first position. Since an inclined surface is formed at the end on the side of receiving the rotating member, the inclined surface is inclined downward as the body member is moved away from the contact surface. A rotating member can be guided to the abutment surface of the abutment member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position.

A gaming machine D7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotary member is arranged on the base member, and the abutment member is arranged on the main body member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively light. Since there is no need to dispose a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacing the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when suppressing rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the body member on the vibration source side can be reduced, making it easier to suppress the rattling.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the abutment surface of the abutment member that abuts on the rotation member. and the rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is aligned with the rotation member of the contact member. Since the abutment surface to be abutted and the rotation axis of the rotating member are substantially parallel to each other, the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position and when displacing it from the first position to the second position While suppressing this, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

That is, since the displacement mode of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts on the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession motion of the displacement member (the motion in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that makes it vibrate. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, respectively, so that the contact surface of the contact member is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from any direction. As a result, when the body member is arranged at the first position and when the body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for displacing the body member. The contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member effectively suppresses rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D8, the game machine comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace the main body member between the first position and the second position, a crank member having a rotating body rotated about a first axis by the driving force of the driving means and a pin projecting from the rotating body eccentrically from the first axis of the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove in which it slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate around the second shaft, and the main body member moves along with the rotation. and an arm member to be displaced, and when the main body member is arranged at the first position, a straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member. The game machine D9 is characterized by being substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the crank member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotary member is likely to rotate in this direction. It becomes difficult to exhibit the effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D9, when the body member is arranged at the first position, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member tries to rotate the arm member due to its displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead center can be formed. That is, rattling of the body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. As a result, even when the body member rattles in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member tends to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead point. can effectively suppress rattling of the body member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Regulation Unit 490 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a main body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, which is the surface of the main body member. The game machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968). However, in the conventional technology described above, the orientation of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the orientation of the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means faces the front side (player side)). (parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (rotational axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotary display device is hindered when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. Since the substrate is accommodated in the body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the body member, the outer shape of the body member when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (body member) is stopped, the visibility of the rear side of the body member can be improved.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the rotating display device comprises a facing member arranged to face the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the rotating display device includes the opposing member arranged opposite to the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is oriented such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (blinking) of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage can be displayed by the afterimage effect. can be done.

In the game machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses formed in a surface facing the substrate and extending in a groove-like shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses that are recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extend in the shape of a groove substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. , and since the plurality of light emitting means are opposed to the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of recesses of the facing member to the front side (game person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being divided by each concave portion, the division of light from each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the contour of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions an edge on the opposite side of the front side of the rotary display device.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions the end on the side opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light irradiated to the concave portion of the facing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is positioned to face the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at a position facing the wall, the end partition wall can be irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A game machine E6 in any one of the game machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member is formed as an uneven surface.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is partially formed as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be diffusely reflected by the uneven surface and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being evenly distributed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being viewed in a biased state in a part of the opening.

In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions) or a surface consisting only of depressions (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as striations or grooves. Moreover, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be circular, elliptical, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end portion of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is: A gaming machine E7 characterized by being formed as a surface smoother than the uneven surface.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end on the front side of the rotary display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. You can increase the light intensity. That is, when an uneven surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member on the front side of the rotary display device, the uneven surface diffusely reflects the light, and the light is diffusely reflected on the front side of the rotary display device ( The light emitted toward the player's side) is reduced, but by making the inner surface of such a predetermined range smoother than the uneven surface, irregular reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotating display device is reduced. It is possible to increase the amount of light directed toward (the player's side).

In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. E8.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the concave-convex surface is not formed increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. (that is, the diameter is expanded), the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be spread. In other words, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the recesses of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the uneven surface arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member A gaming machine E9 characterized in that the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the uneven surface is arranged, the more the main body Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the visually recognized brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to have a higher brightness (brighter) than the light from the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased as the uneven surface disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction outward. , the concave portion (light emitting means) located radially outwardly away from the rotating shaft of the main body member, the diffused reflection due to the uneven surface is increased (that is, the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means is decreased). , can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In any one of game machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided to cover the end portion of the recess of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the cover member includes , a game machine E10 characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end portion of the recess.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover is provided to cover the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A member is provided, and the cover member has an uneven surface formed at least in the area facing the end of the recess. ) can be emitted. That is, since the emitted light can be spread, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member is interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the intervening member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions. A gaming machine E11 characterized by comprising a through hole formed through at a position through which the game machine E11 passes.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like intervening member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the intervening member includes a plurality of Since the through-holes are provided at positions through which the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are communicated, the light from each light-emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding recesses, and is prevented from entering (leaking) the adjacent recesses. can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure for causing the light from the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from two members, the facing member and the intervening member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case of forming from members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

In the game machine E11, the game machine E12 is characterized in that the intervening member has a seat portion that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E11, the intervening member has a seat that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat, so that light from each light emitting means can be emitted. can be easily incident on the through-hole, and leakage to the outside of the through-hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. In addition, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent light emitting means from entering the through hole, so that the appearance of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be made clear.

In the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through holes are formed in a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. are arranged concentrically.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effects of the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole has a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are arranged concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

A game machine E14 in the game machine E13, characterized in that the through hole has an inner diameter that expands from the substrate side toward the opposing member.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through-hole is expanded from the substrate side toward the facing member, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting means passes through the through-hole. The light can be efficiently incident on the concave portion through the hole. Moreover, since the area abutting on the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light from each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A gaming machine E15 in any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, wherein the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the intervening member facing the substrate.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the intervening member facing the substrate, so that the portion of the protrusion faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

A game machine E16 in the gaming machine E15, wherein the intervening member has a groove-like groove recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extending along the base of the seat.

According to the game machine E16, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15, the facing member has a groove-shaped groove recessed in the surface facing the board and extending along the base of the seat. It is possible to enhance the heat dissipation effect while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat, the recessed area of the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured, while the light emitting means is illuminated. It is possible to increase the heat dissipation effect by enlarging the space for the part where the heat generated by the operation particularly concentrates.

A gaming machine E17 in the gaming machine E15 or E16, characterized in that the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other.

According to the game machine E17, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15 or E16, the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other, so that the rigidity of the intervening member can be increased.

In this case, the outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions may be circular, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions may be connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seat portions are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape, so that the rigidity of the interposing member can be increased by utilizing the uneven outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. can rise.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Sorting Device 4700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; An opening formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means and having a size through which the ball can pass, and a ball flowing out from the opening into the game area are formed so as to pass through the opening. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege in accordance with the passage of the game machine F1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting the passage of the ball through the passage member is arranged downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the passage member only has the function of guiding the ball toward its downstream side (sensor device). There was a problem that it was difficult to

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, the first privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means and has a size through which the ball can pass, and the ball flowing out from the opening into the game area is formed so as to be able to pass therethrough. Since the second privilege imparting means is provided for imparting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes through, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the ball that has flowed out can be formed. passes through the second privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege can be granted by the second privilege granting means. As a result, the ball guided by the passage member not only passes through the first privilege imparting means, but also flows out from the opening into the game area, and furthermore, the outflowing ball passes through the second privilege imparting means. Form can be formed, and interest can be imparted to the game.

It should be noted that the second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, or, depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, Some balls may be received and some balls may not be received.

Also, the privilege granted by the first privilege imparting means and the privilege imparted by the second privilege imparting means may be the same privilege or may be different privileges.

In the game machine F1, the passage member has a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the balls at the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F2, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the bent portion, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

The game machine F2 is provided with a game board on which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the game board. Characterized game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, since at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board, the bent portion of the passage member When ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed through the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging. In addition, when the game ball flows out to the game area from the opening of the passage member, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows out, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the ball entrance of the second privilege imparting means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, since at least the ball entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the game board, game balls flow out to the game area from the opening of the passage member. When playing the game, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the outflowing ball enters the ball entrance of the second privilege providing means, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a connecting passage is provided for connecting the second privilege imparting means to the passage member and guiding a ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member, the connecting passage being , the gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege imparting means is connected to the passage member, and the connection passage for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member is provided. Since the connecting passage is connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means, the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball is the second player. When the ball passes through the second privilege imparting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connecting passage and passed through the first privilege imparting means. Therefore, in addition to awarding the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, a distribution means is provided for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other, the passage members are arranged in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the swing member. A game machine F6 is connected to one of dividing means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, it is equipped with a distribution means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other. One of the passage members is connected to one of the sorting means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means, so that balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, it is possible to prevent clogging of the passage member with the balls.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6 is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Characteristic game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and that light (for example, a game There is known a game machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by a person's hand (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-208139).
However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a game machine that can secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player. intended to
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and emitting light. a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device by receiving light reflected by the object of the light, the sensor device being arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, A front member having at least a front surface formed as a convex curved surface and made of a light transmissive material is provided.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member extends along the periphery of the front member. The first portion of them is disposed at a position closer to the front side than the second portion.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to ensure a detectable range for an object while making the sensor device less visible to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, visibility of the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the curvature of the front member can be increased.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 shaft support (second shaft)
417 protrusions (first axis)
430 displacement member (arm member)
431 drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441 drive motor (driving means)
443 transmission gear (crank member)
443a protrusion (pin portion)
450 decorative member (displacement member)
452 front base (body member)
452h contact surface (contact member)
491c swelling portion (opposing member)
492 roller member (rotating member)
492b shaft (shaft)
500 rotation unit (rotation display device)
510 top base (part of body member)
512, 522 ventilation holes (through holes)
520 lower base (part of body member)
531 base member (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 intermediate plate (interposed member)
543 irradiation hole (through hole)
544 irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 groove
550 front cover (transmitting part, cover member)
560 reflector (opposing member)
563a inclined surface (opposing member)
570 rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame body (center frame)
621 cover member (front member)
621a first part
621b second part
630 sensor (sensor device)
640a second winning device (winning device)
740 passage member (bending member)
742 guide part (inclined surface)
743 lower protrusion (flexion)
744 aperture
KR1 first throw path (vertical path)
KR2 second throw path (extended path)
KR3 3rd throwing path (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing path (part of inclined passage)

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 shaft support (second shaft)
417 protrusion (first axis)
430 displacement member (arm member)
431 drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441 drive motor (driving means)
443 transmission gear (crank member)
443a Protrusion (pin portion)
450 decorative member (displacement member)
452 front base (body member)
452h contact surface (contact member)
491c swelling portion (opposing member)
492 roller member (rotating member)
492b shaft (shaft)
500 rotation unit (rotating display device)
510 top base (part of body member)
512, 522 Blow hole (through hole)
520 lower base (part of body member)
531 base member (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 groove portion 550 front cover (transmission portion, cover member)
560 reflector (opposing member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame body (center frame)
621 cover member (front member)
621a first portion 621b second portion 630 sensor (sensor device)
640a second winning device (winning device)
740 passage member (bending member)
742 Guide part (inclined surface)
743 lower protrusion (flexion)
744 Opening KR1 First throw path (vertical passage)
KR2 second throw path (extended path)
KR3 3rd throwing path (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing path (part of inclined passage)

Claims (3)

A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by an object of the light. A gaming machine comprising a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the
A gaming machine comprising a front member disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the front member having at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and made of a light-transmitting material. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value. A displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member is arranged such that the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is positioned closer to the front than the second portion. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine is provided with:

Images